Revelation 7:9 — Word Study
N1904Μετὰ ταῦτα εἶδον καὶ ἰδοὺ ὄχλος πολὺς ὃν ἀριθμῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἐκ παντὸς ἔθνους καὶ φυλῶν καὶ λαῶν καὶ γλωσσῶν ἑστῶτες ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου, περιβεβλημένους στολὰς λευκὰς καὶ φοίνικες ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτῶν.
BSAAftermeta these thingsohutos [following these events, subsequently] I lookedhoraō▸ andkai beholdhoraō▸ a multitudeochlos [a great crowd] greatpolus whichhos, hē to numberarithmeō▸ it no [one]oudeis was abledunamai▸ out ofek everypas nationethnos [all Gentiles, people groups] andkai tribesphulē [clans, families] andkai peopleslaos [a specific nation or race] andkai tonguesglōssa [language, dialect] standinghistēmi■ [in the presence of] beforeenōpion theho thronethronos [the seat of God's power, authority] andkai beforeenōpion theho Lamb,arnion [Jesus, the innocent and pure one] having clothed themselves withperiballō■✻ robesstolē [long, dignified garments] whiteleukos [pure, clean] andkai palm branchesphoinix [symbol of celebration, victory] inen theho handscheir [as a symbol of worship, praise] of them.autos
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| Μετὰ | After | Preposition |
| ταῦτα | these things | Demonstrative pronoun, accusative, plural |
| εἶδον | I looked | Verb, second aorist, active |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ἰδοὺ | behold | Verb, second aorist, middle |
| ὄχλος | a multitude | Noun, nominative, singular |
| πολὺς | great | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| ὃν | which | Relative pronoun, accusative, singular |
| ἀριθμῆσαι | to number | Verb, aorist, active |
| αὐτὸν | it | |
| οὐδεὶς | no [one] | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| ἐδύνατο | was able | Verb, imperfect, no voice stated |
| ἐκ | out of | Preposition |
| παντὸς | every | Adjective, genitive, singular |
| ἔθνους | nation | Noun, genitive, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| φυλῶν | tribes | Noun, genitive, plural |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| λαῶν | peoples | Noun, genitive, plural |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| γλωσσῶν | tongues | Noun, genitive, plural |
| ἑστῶτες | standing | Verb, perfect, active |
| ἐνώπιον | before | Preposition |
| τοῦ | the | Article, genitive, singular |
| θρόνου | throne | Noun, genitive, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ἐνώπιον | before | Preposition |
| τοῦ | the | Article, genitive, singular |
| ἀρνίου, | Lamb, | Noun, genitive, singular |
| περιβεβλημένους | having clothed themselves with | Verb, perfect, passive |
| στολὰς | robes | Noun, accusative, plural |
| λευκὰς | white | Adjective, accusative, plural |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| φοίνικες | palm branches | Noun, accusative, plural |
| ἐν | in | Preposition |
| ταῖς | the | Article, dative, plural |
| χερσὶν | hands | Noun, dative, plural |
| αὐτῶν. | of them. | Personal pronoun, genitive, plural |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | After this I looked and saw a multitude too large to count, from every nation and tribe and people and tongue, standing before the throne and before the Lamb. They were wearing white robes and holding palm branches in their hands. |
| KJV | After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands; |
| ASV | After these things I saw, and behold, a great multitude, which no man could number, out of every nation and of all tribes and peoples and tongues, standing before the throne and before the Lamb, arrayed in white robes, and palms in their hands; |
| YLT | After these things I saw, and lo, a great multitude, which to number no one was able, out of all nations, and tribes, and peoples, and tongues, standing before the throne, and before the Lamb, arrayed in white robes, and palms in their hands, |
| WEB | After these things I looked, and behold, a great multitude which no man could count, out of every nation and of all tribes, peoples, and languages, standing before the throne and before the Lamb, dressed in white robes, with palm branches in their hands. |
| BBE | After these things I saw a great army of people more than might be numbered, out of every nation and of all tribes and peoples and languages, taking their places before the high seat and before the Lamb, dressed in white robes, and with branches in their hands, |
Where they part company is ὄχλος — see How Translations Differ.
The structure is built around a main clause with several phrases providing additional details about the multitude.
8 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them ›
clause
subjectὄχλος
verbοἶδα
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Revelation 7:9
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — The Great Multitude in Heavengenerated
Revelation 7:9 presents a scene in which John witnesses a multitude that cannot be counted, gathered from every corner of the earth. This vision emphasizes the inclusivity of God's salvation, as people from all nations, tribes, and languages come together to worship before the throne of God and the Lamb. The imagery of white robes and palm branches signifies purity and victory, reflecting the joy of salvation and the celebration of eternal life.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Genesis 49:10 | The scepter will not depart from Judah, nor the staff from between his feet, until Shiloh comes and the allegiance of the nations is his. |
| 2 | Psalm 2:8 | Ask Me, and I will make the nations Your inheritance, the ends of the earth Your possession. |
| 3 | Psalm 22:27 | All the ends of the earth will remember and turn to the LORD. All the families of the nations will bow down before Him. |
| 4 | Psalm 72:7–11 | May the righteous flourish in his days and prosperity abound, until the moon is no more. |
| 5 | Psalm 76:4 | You are resplendent with light, more majestic than mountains filled with game. |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 36 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — ὄχλος, ochlosgenerated
The word ὄχλος (transliterated as ochlos) refers to a large crowd or multitude of people. It is often used to describe gatherings of individuals, particularly in a religious or social context. In this verse, it highlights the vast number of believers who have come together in worship.
The noun is in the nominative case and singular form, indicating a collective group. This emphasizes the unity of the multitude, despite their diverse backgrounds, as they stand together in front of God's throne.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
The translations agree on the depiction of a large crowd gathered from various nations, tribes, and languages. The BSB states 'a multitude too large to count,' while the KJV refers to 'a great multitude, which no man could number.'
However, they differ slightly in wording. For instance, the ASV uses 'a great multitude, which no man could number,' while the WEB opts for 'a great multitude which no man could count.' Such variations reflect different choices in rendering the same Greek concepts.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The verse is structured around the main verb εἶδον, I looked, which introduces the vision. It is followed by a series of phrases that describe the multitude and their actions.
The subject of the main clause is the multitude, identified by the following phrases: 'from every nation and tribe and people and tongue,' which detail the diversity of the crowd. The participial phrase 'standing before the throne and before the Lamb' describes their position in the vision.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
The word ὄχλος does not have a direct equivalent in the Septuagint but corresponds to the Hebrew term for a crowd or assembly, often used in contexts referring to gatherings of people in worship or significant events.
This connection underscores the continuity of the theme of community worship from the Old Testament to the New Testament, as seen in various passages that depict God's people coming together.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Revelation 7:9 describes a vision where John sees an enormous crowd of people from all nations, tribes, and languages standing before God and the Lamb. They are dressed in white robes, symbolizing purity, and are holding palm branches, which represent victory and celebration.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
The multitude symbolizes the diversity of believers from all over the world, united in worship before God, reflecting the global reach of the Gospel.
The white robes signify purity and righteousness, indicating that they have been cleansed and redeemed through the sacrifice of Jesus.
Palm branches are symbols of victory and celebration, often associated with triumph and joy, reflecting the believers' victory over sin and death.
Standing before the throne signifies being in the presence of God, where believers worship and honor Him, acknowledging His sovereignty and authority.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- How can I embrace the diversity of God's people in my community?
- What does it mean for me to stand before God in worship?
- In what ways can I celebrate the victory of salvation in my life?
- How can I share the message of hope and inclusion found in this vision with others?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
Early church Fathers reflect on the significance of this vision, emphasizing the unity and victory of the believers before God.
If, therefore, we also live as dedicated and devoted to God-if we make our way over the ancient and sacred footsteps of the righteous, let us go through the same proofs of sufferings, the same testimonies of passions,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 7 →
Of the benefits of martyrdom. In the Proverbs of Solomon: "The faithful martyr delivers his soul from evils." Also in the same place: "Then shall the righteous stand in great boldness against them who have afflicted them,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 7 →
"After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man was able to number, of every nation, tribe, and people, and tongue, clothed with white robes." What the great multitude out of every tribe implies,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 7 →
Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Revelation 7:9 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleAfter this I beheld,.... What follows is a distinct vision from the preceding one, and is not a continuation of that, as if the sealing of the Jewish believers was designed by the former, and the
Read John Gill on Revelation 7 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryAfter this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white
Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 7 →Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy BibleIf we inquire who these were, we are told, , by the best Interpreter: These are they which came out of great tribulation, and have washed their robes, & c. So that they do not seem to be the one hundred and forty-four thousand mentioned for preservation in and from the evil, , but such as had escaped, or were not in or going into tribulation, but come out. The number of the former was determined; it is said of these, it could not be numbered. These were glorified ones, not militant; they stood before the throne, and the Lamb, clothed with white robes; clothed in the habits of such as amongst the Romans had fought, and conquered, and triumphed; and to this end they are said to have carried…
Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 7 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments9 After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands; Ver. 9. A great multitude] All the faithful from the apostles to the end of the world. In all ages there were some that sought righteousness; neither was it ever so hard with the Church as the host at Nola (in the story) made it; who when he was commanded by the Roman censor to go and call the good men of the city to appear before him, went to the church yards, and there called at the graves of the dead, O ye good men of Nola, come away, for the Roman censor calls…
Read John Trapp on Revelation 7 →Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(9) After this I beheld . . .—Better, After these things I saw, and behold! a great multitude which no one was able to number, out of every nation, and (all) tribes, and peoples, and tongues, standing before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed in white robes, and palm branches in their hands. “A great multitude:” We have just had the picture of the sealing of a multitude which could be numbered: now we have the picture of a countless throng. Who are these? Are they the same as the one hundred and forty-four thousand, or are they others? Our answer must be that this vision gives the climax of the previous one. The sealing represented the Passover of the Church: this vision represents…
Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 7 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 9. A great multitude] This appears to mean the Church of Christ among the Gentiles, for it was different from that collected from the twelve tribes; and it is here said to be of all nations, kindreds, people, and tongues. Clothed with white robes] As emblems of innocence and purity. With palms in their hands, in token of victory gained over the world, the devil, and the flesh.
Read AdamClarke on Revelation 7 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and CollegesThe Praise of the Great Multitude of the Redeemed, Revelation 7:9-179. of all nations, and kindreds, &c.] Lit. out of every nation, and tribes, and peoples, and tongues.white robes] Cf. Revelation 3:5, Revelation 6:11.palms] Opinions differ as to the meaning of this image, whether we are to compare the Pagan use of the palm-branch as a symbol of victory, given e.g. to winners at the public games, or the Israelite custom of bearing branches of palm, as of other sacred trees, at the Feast of Tabernacles: see Leviticus 23:40, and cf. St John 12:13. Although Jewish rather than Gentile imagery is to be expected in this book, the former view seems on the whole more reasonable, as it gives a more…
Read Cambridge on Revelation 7 →Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the BibleAfter this - Greek,” After these things” - Μετὰταῦτα Meta tauta: that is, after I saw these things thus represented I had another vision.
Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 7 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
After this I looked and saw a multitude too large to count, from every nation and tribe and people and tongue, standing before the throne and before the Lamb. They were wearing white robes and holding palm branches in their hands.
After these things I looked, and behold, a great multitude which no man could count, out of every nation and of all tribes, peoples, and languages, standing before the throne and before the Lamb, dressed in white robes, with palm branches in their hands.
After this I looked and saw a multitude too large to count, from every nation and tribe and people and tongue, standing before the throne and before the Lamb. They were wearing white robes and holding palm branches in their hands.
After these things I looked, and here was an enormous crowd that no one could count, made up of persons from every nation, tribe, people, and language, standing before the throne and before the Lamb dressed in long white robes, and with palm branches in their hands.
Tyndale line
After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands;
After these things I saw, and behold, a great multitude, which no man could number, out of every nation and of all tribes and peoples and tongues, standing before the throne and before the Lamb, arrayed in white robes, and palms in their hands;
After these things I saw, and behold, a great multitude, which no man could number, out of every nation and of all tribes and peoples and tongues, standing before the throne and before the Lamb, arrayed in white robes, and palms in their hands;
After this I beheld, and lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and languages, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands;
After these thinges I behelde, and loe a great multitude, which no man coulde number, of all nations and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stoode before the throne, and before the Lambe, clothed with long white robes, and palmes in their hands.
Strictly literal
After these things I saw, and lo, a great crowd, which no one could number, out of every nation and tribes and peoples and tongues, standing before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palm branches in their hands.
After these things I saw, and lo, a great multitude, which to number no one was able, out of all nations, and tribes, and peoples, and tongues, standing before the throne, and before the Lamb, arrayed in white robes, and palms in their hands,
After these things I saw, and behold, a great multitude, which no one was able to number, out of all nations, and tribes, and peoples, and tongues, standing before the throne, and before the Lamb, having been clothed [in] white robes, and palms in their hands,
After these things I looked, and there was a huge multitude that no one could count—from every nation, tribe, people, and language—standing before the throne and in front of the Lamb. They were wearing white robes and holding palm branches in their hands,
From the Latin
After this I saw a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and tribes, and peoples, and tongues, standing before the throne, and in sight of the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands:
Simplified
After this I looked and saw a great crowd that nobody could count, made up of every nation, tribe, people and language. They were standing in front of the throne and the Lamb, dressed in white robes, with palm branches in their hands.
After these things I saw a great army of people more than might be numbered, out of every nation and of all tribes and peoples and languages, taking their places before the high seat and before the Lamb, dressed in white robes, and with branches in their hands,
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
Post hæc vidi turbam magnam, quam dinumerare nemo poterat, ex omnibus gentibus, et tribubus, et populis, et linguis : stantes ante thronum, et in conspectu Agni, amicti stolis albis, et palmæ in manibus eorum :
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܒܬܪܟܢ ܚܙܝܬ ܟܢܫܐ ܣܓܝܐܐ ܐܝܢܐ ܕܠܡܢܝܢܗ ܠܝܬ ܕܡܨܐ ܗܘܐ ܡܢ ܟܠ ܥܡ ܘܫܪܒܐ ܘܐܡܘܢ ܘܠܫܢܝܢ ܕܩܝܡܝܢ ܩܕܡ ܟܘܪܣܝܐ ܘܩܕܡܘܗܝ ܕܐܡܪܐ ܘܡܥܛܦܝܢ ܐܣܛܠܐ ܚܘܪܬܐ ܘܒܐܝܕܝܗܘܢ ܕܩܠܐ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
Μετὰ ταῦτα εἶδον καὶ ἰδοὺ ὄχλος πολὺς ὃν ἀριθμῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἐκ παντὸς ἔθνους καὶ φυλῶν καὶ λαῶν καὶ γλωσσῶν ἑστῶτες ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου, περιβεβλημένους στολὰς λευκὰς καὶ φοίνικες ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτῶν.
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
Μετὰ ταῦτα εἶδον καὶ ἰδοὺ ὄχλος πολὺς ὃν ἀριθμῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἐκ παντὸς ἔθνους καὶ φυλῶν καὶ λαῶν καὶ γλωσσῶν ἑστῶτες ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου, περιβεβλημένους στολὰς λευκὰς καὶ φοίνικες ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτῶν.
The previous edition, still widely cited.
Μετὰ ταῦτα εἶδον καὶ ἰδοὺ ὄχλος πολὺς ὃν ἀριθμῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἐκ παντὸς ἔθνους καὶ φυλῶν καὶ λαῶν καὶ γλωσσῶν ἑστῶτες ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου, περιβεβλημένους στολὰς λευκὰς καὶ φοίνικες ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτῶν.
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
Μετὰ ταῦτα εἶδον καὶ ἰδοὺ ὄχλος πολὺς ὃν ἀριθμῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἐκ παντὸς ἔθνους καὶ φυλῶν καὶ λαῶν καὶ γλωσσῶν ἑστῶτες ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου, περιβεβλημένους στολὰς λευκὰς καὶ φοίνικες ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτῶν.
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
Μετὰ ταῦτα εἶδον καὶ ἰδοὺ ὄχλος πολὺς ὃν ἀριθμῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἐκ παντὸς ἔθνους καὶ φυλῶν καὶ λαῶν καὶ γλωσσῶν ἑστῶτες ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου, περιβεβλημένους στολὰς λευκὰς καὶ φοίνικες ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτῶν.
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
Μετὰ ταῦτα εἶδον καὶ ἰδοὺ ὄχλος πολὺς ὃν ἀριθμῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἐκ παντὸς ἔθνους καὶ φυλῶν καὶ λαῶν καὶ γλωσσῶν ἑστῶτες ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου, περιβεβλημένους στολὰς λευκὰς καὶ φοίνικες ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτῶν.
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
Μετὰ ταῦτα εἶδον καὶ ἰδοὺ ὄχλος πολὺς ὃν ἀριθμῆσαι — οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἐκ παντὸς ἔθνους καὶ φυλῶν καὶ λαῶν καὶ γλωσσῶν — ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου, περιβεβλημένους στολὰς λευκὰς καὶ — ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτῶν.
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
Μετὰ ταῦτα εἶδον καὶ ἰδοὺ ὄχλος πολὺς ὃν ἀριθμῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἐκ παντὸς ἔθνους καὶ φυλῶν καὶ λαῶν καὶ γλωσσῶν ἑστῶτες ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου, — στολὰς λευκὰς καὶ φοίνικες ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτῶν.
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| αὐτὸν it | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR | Byz |
| ἑστῶτες standing | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR | Byz |
| περιβεβλημένους having clothed themselves with | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, Byz | TR |
| φοίνικες palm branches | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR | Byz |
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Revelation 7:9
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
The Greek word μετά (transliterated as meta) is a preposition that can mean 'with,' 'among,' or 'after,' depending on the case it governs (genitive, accusative, or sometimes dative). In the New Testament, it is used to indicate association or companionship, as in Mark 1:29, and to denote sequence in time or place, as seen in Hebrews 9:3. The entries do not show significant disagreement.
μετά, [on its neylect of elision before proper names beginning with a vowel, and before sundry other words (at least in Tdf.’s text) see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. WH. Intr. p- 146°; W.§ 5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition, akin to μέσος (as Germ. mit to Mitte, mitten) and hence prop. in the midst of, amid, denoting association, union, accompaniment; [but some recent etymologists doubt its kinship to μέσος ; some connect it rather with ἅμα, Germ. sammt, ef. Curtius § 212; Vaniéek p. 972]. It takes the gen. and ace. (in the Grk. poets also the dat.). [On the distinetion between μετά and σύν, see σύν, init. ] I. with the Genitive (Sept. for ΠΝ, DY, WM, ete.); among, with, [ef. W. 376 (352) sq.]; 1. amid, among ; a. prop.: μετὰ τῶν νεκρῶν, among the dead, Lk. xxiv. 5 (μετὰ νεκρῶν κείσομαι, Eur. Hee. 209; θάψετέ με μετὰ τῶν πατέρων μου, Gen. xlix. 29 Sept.; μετὰ ζώντων εἶναι, to be among the…
Read the full entry →μετά. In the NT (as in classical prose) μετά is construed only with the gen. and the acc., and the various shades of meaning connected with these two usages can be readily illustrated from our sources. (1) c. gen.—(a) For the ordinary meaning ‘‘ with,” ‘in company with,” we may cite P Eleph 11° (B.c. 311-10) (= Selections, p. 4) τοὶ pera Δημητρίας, “those acting with Demetria,’’ P Tebt I. 3519 (B.C. 111) ὃς κ[α]ὶ μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν ὑπὸ | τὴν ἐντολὴν e(om.) ὑπογράφει, ‘* who shall append his signature to the edict together with yours ” (Edd.), P Amh IT. 1355} | (early 1i/A.D.) ἐρρῶσθαί σε ed ) μετὰ τῶν τέ δ: A parallel to this &r. εἰρ. = ‘‘partition-wall” (Eph 214). (early ΠΑ: ἐρρῷσθαύσε etx (ou) here rey τευ ΠΣ a pray for your health and for that of your children” (Edd.), P Oxy III. 5314 (ii/A.D.) ἡδέως σε ἀσπαζόμεθα πάντες οἱ ἐν (= Selections, p. 102) καλῶς ἐποίησες οὐκ ἀπένηχές (/, ἀπήνεγκες)…
Read the full entry →μετά (meta) — with/after.
μετά [ᾰ,
but ᾱ in [Refs 5th c.BC+]], poetry μεταί, uncertain, only in μεταιβολί; Aeolic dialect, Doric dialect, [Refs 4th c.AD+]: preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative (Cf. Goth. mip, OHG. miti, mit 'with'.)
__A WITH GEN. (in which use μ. gradually superseded σύν, which see),
__A.I in the midst of, among, between, with plural Nouns, μετ᾽ ἄλλων λέξο ἑταίρων [Refs 8th c.BC+] with one, [Refs 5th c.BC+], i.e. among no men, [Refs]
__A.II in common, along with, by aid of (implying a closer union than σύν), μ. Βοιωτῶν ἐμάχοντο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; συνδιεπολέμησαν τὸν πόλεμον μ. Ἀθηναίων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. τῆς βουλῆς in co-operation with the council, [Refs 8th c.BC+] with, i.e. by aid of, Athena, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μ. τινὸς πάσχειν, δρᾶν τι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. τινὸς εἶναι to be on one's side, [Refs…
μετά
meta
a primary preposition (often used adverbially); properly, denoting
accompaniment; "amid" (local or causal); modified variously according
to the case (genitive association, or accusative succession) with
which it is joined; occupying an intermediate position between 575 or
1537 and 1519 or 4314; less intimate than 1722 and less close than
4862):--after(-ward), X that he again, against, among, X and,
+ follow, hence, hereafter, in, of, (up-)on, + our, X and
setting, since, (un-)to, + together, when, with (+ -out). Often used
in composition, in substantially the same relations of participation
or proximity, and transfer or sequence.
see GREEK for 4314
see GREEK for 575
see GREEK for 1537
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1722
see GREEK for 4862
μετά
Prep.
with, after
μετά meta 469x
(1) gen., with, together with, Mt. 16:27; 12:41; 26:55; with, on the same side or party with, in aid of, Mt. 12:30; 20:20; with, by means of, Acts 13:17; with, of conflict, Rev. 11:7; with, among, Lk. 24:5; with, to, towards, Lk. 1:58, 72; (2) acc., after, of place, behind, Heb. 9:3; of time, after, Mt. 17:1; 24:29; followed by an infin. with the neut. article, after, after that, Mt.…
Read the full entry →μετά in the midst of, among with gen., dat., and acc.
Prep. with gen., dat., and acc.
WITH GEN. in the midst of, among a number, μετ᾽ ἄλλων ἑταίρων Od.; πολλῶν μετὰ δούλων Aesch.
in common, along with, μετὰ Βοιωτῶν ἐμάχοντο Il.; μ. ξυμμάχων κινδυνεύειν Thuc.; μετά τινος πάσχειν, στῆναι Aesch., Soph.
with, by means of, ἱκετεύειν μετὰ δακρύων Plat.; μετ᾽ ἀρετῆς πρωτεύειν Xen.:—as a periphr. for Adverbs, ὁσίως καὶ μετ᾽ ἀληθείας Plat.
WITH DAT., only poet., mostly epic,
properly of persons, among, in company with, μετὰ τριτάτοισιν ἄνασσεν in or among the third generation Nestor reigned, Il.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
473 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 470 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 930 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
χρόνος γὰρ οὐκ ἦν πρὸ κόσμου, ἀλλ’ ἢ σὺν αὐτῷ γέγονεν ἢ μετ’ αὐτόν·
ὡς ὁ κατακλυσμὸς ἐγένετο καὶ ὃν τρόπον Νῶχος σωθεὶς ἐν λάρνακι μετὰ τῶν συγγενῶν κατῴκησεν ἐν τῷ Σινάρῳ πεδίῳ.
λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.
τῶν συνκυρόντων πάντων ὧν κεκράτηκεν ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν ἐφʼ ὅσον περιῆι χρόνον, ἡμῶν δὲ μετὰ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτὴν τῶν λοιπῶν κρατουσῶν, Ἀρίστων Ἀθηνοδότου τῶν ἀπὸ Διὸς πόλεως τῆς μεγάλης
Ἀράβισσα ὡς ἐτῶν κζ μέση μελίχρως λεύκωμα ὀφθαλμόν, μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύρριν αἱ τρεῖς τῶν Ψεμμίνιος μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῶν ἀδελφοῦ Παχνούβιος τοῦ προγεγραμμένου καὶ συνπωλουμένου, ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτοῖς πατρικῆς
Διοπολίτου ἐπὶ … τοῦ παρὰ … ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Ὧρος Ἑρμίου ὡς ἐτῶν δέκα δύο μετὰ προσπωλουμένης τῆς Ὥρου συγγενοῦς Ἀρσινόης τῆς Βελλέους ὡς ἐτῶν κβ μέσης μελιχρόου στρογγυλοπροσώπου εὐθύρινος
The Greek word οὗτος (i.e., *houtos*) is a demonstrative pronoun meaning 'this' or 'this one.' It is used to refer to something nearby or recently mentioned, often with a connotation of contempt in certain contexts. In the New Testament, it appears in various forms, such as in Matthew 3:17 and John 1:15, and can also serve to emphasize or clarify a subject.
οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, gen., τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου,
[in LXX chiefly for זֶה, זֹאת;]
demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille),
this;
as subst., this one, he;
οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, demonstrative pron. [ef. Curtius p. 543], Hebr. 71, ΠΝ, this; used I. absolutely. 1. a. this one, visibly present here: Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk. ix. 7; Lk. vii. 44 sq.; ix. 35; 2 Pet.i.17. Mt.ix.3; xxi. 38; Mk. xiv. 69; Lk. 11. 34; xxiii. 2; Jn. i. 15, 30; vii. 25; ix. 8 54. 19; xviii. 21,50; xxi. 21; Actsii. 15; iv. 10; ix. 21; according to the nature and character of the person or thing mentioned, it is used with a suggestion —either of contempt, as Mt. xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 2 sq.: Lk. v. 21; vii. 39,49; Jn. vi. 42,52; vii. 15; or of admiration, Mt. xxi. 11; Actsix.21; οἵ, Wahl, Clavis apocryphor. V. T. p- 370% b. it refers to a subject immediately preceding, the one just named: Lk. i. 32; ii. 37 [RGL]; Jn. i. 2; vi. 71; 2 Tim. iii. 6,8, ete.; at the beginning of a narrative about one already mentioned, Mt. iii. 3; Lk. xvi. 1; Jn. i. 41 (42); ili. 2; xii. 21; xxi.…
Read the full entry →οὗτος. A few of the prepositional phrases with this common demonstrative pron. may be illustrated διὰ τοῦτο, ‘on this account,” cf. P Ryl IT. 845 (a.p. 146) τὴν ἄνεσιν τὴν διὰ τοῦτο γενομένην τῶν ὑπαρχόντων, “the ensuing remission “ OUT@S, O’.TO@ of the lands’ (Edd.): ἐκ τούτου, ‘for this reason,’’ Jn 6° cf. 26. 81°4 (c, A.D, 104) ἐκ τούτου δὲ [φανεῖρόν ἐστιν [καὶ] μηδένα χρῇζειν, “‘it is evident from this that nobody wants it’’ (Edd.), BGU 11. 423!7 (ason to his father—ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 91) με ἐπαίδευσας καλῶς, Kal ἐκ τούτου ἐλπίζω ταχὺ προκόσί-- par τῶν θε[ῶ]ν θελόντων, “you have brought me up well, and for this reason I hope to be quickly promoted, if the gods will”: τούτου ἕνεκα, ‘‘ for this purpose,” cf. P Oxy I. 1138 (ii/a.p.) ἐὰν δ᾽ dpa μή, ; ἅμα τῷ vide μου ἐξέρχομαι τούτου ἕνεκα, “otherwise I and my son will come for this purpose’’ (Edd.): ἐπὶ τούτων, ““upon this,” ‘in…
Read the full entry →οὗτος (ohutos) — this/he/she/it.
οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο,
genitive τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc.: the dual feminine never in Attic dialect, see ὁ, ἡ, τό, [near the start]:—demonstrative pronoun, this, common from [Refs 8th c.BC+]
__A ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο probably arose from a reduplication of the demonstrative ὁ, ἡ, τό with insertion of -υ- (= Sanskrit Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα from τα-υ-τα: Doric dialect genitive singular feminine τούτας [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc., the latter is uncertain in [Refs 5th c.BC+], as genitive singular neuter οὕτω [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; accusative singular feminine οὕταν [Refs 6th c.BC+] —In _Attic dialect_ οὗτος was frequently strengthened by the _demonstrative_ -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, _genitive_ τουτουί, _dative_ τουτῳί, _accusative_ τουτονί; plural nominative οὑτοιί, neuter ταυτί, etc., this man here…
οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο
Dem.pr.
this, he, she, it
οὗτος houtos 1x
this, this person or thing, Mt. 3:3, 9, 17; 8:9; 10:2; 24:34, et al. freq.; used by way of contempt, this fellow, Mt. 13:55; 27:47; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, this very thing, this same thing, 2 Cor. 2:3; 7:11; εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο, and elliptically, αὐτὸ τοῦτο, for this same purpose, on this account, Eph. 6:18, 22; 2 Pet. 1:5; καὶ οὗτος, and moreover, Lk. 7:12; 16:1; 20:30; καὶ τοῦτο, and that too, 1 Cor. 6:6, 8; tοῦτο μὲν ... τοῦτο δέ, partly ... partly, Heb.…
Read the full entry →οὗτος demonstr. Pron. this, Lat. hic, to designate the nearer of two things, opp. to ἐκεῖνος, the more remote (cf. ὅδε), Hom., etc.
when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε generally refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes, Soph., etc.
so also, οὗτος is used emphat., generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος (like Lat. ille) denotes praise, ὁ πάντ᾽ ἄναλκις οὗτος, i. e. Aegisthus, id. Soph.; οὗτος ἀνήρ Plat.; τούτους τοὺς συκοφάντας id. Plat.
in attic law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff or defendant, whereas in Lat. hic was the client, iste the opponent, Dem.
often much like an adv., in local sense (cf. ὅδε init.), τίς δ᾽ οὗτος κατὰ νῆας ἔρχεαι; who art thou here that comest . . ? Il.; often in attic, τίς οὑτοσί; who's this…
Dem-APN — Demonstrative pronoun · accusative · plural · neuteraccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
D-APN Part of Speech: Demonstrative pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
1,424 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 49 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,388 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
29 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 2,054 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…
ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.
ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας
εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.
The Greek word οἶδα (i.e., *oida*) is derived from the root of εἶδον (i.e., *eidon*), meaning 'to see' or 'to perceive.' It primarily conveys the idea of knowing or having knowledge, often used in contexts where one has seen or understood something. The New Testament employs it in various constructions, indicating knowledge of things, people, or concepts.
οἶδα, (from same root as εἶδον, q.v.),
[in LXX chiefly for ידע;]
pf. with pres. meaning (plpf. as impf.; on irregular tense-forms, v. App.),
οἶδα καὶ τὰς προστιμή[σεις τῶν] ὀθονίων ἕως τοῦ ν (ἔτους), ““ἀπᾷ they remit to the overseers of the temples and the chief priests and priests the arrears on account of both the tax for overseers and the values of woven cloths up to the soth year”’ (Edd.): see the editors’ note ad 7. and P Rey L}xxxvii-cvii with the note on p. 175, also OG/ZS go! (Rosetta stone— B.C. 196) τῶν τ᾽ εἰς TO βασιλικὸν συντελουμένων ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς βυσσίνων ὀθονίων ἀπέλυσεν τὰ δύο μέρη, {0.25 τὰς τιμὰς τῶν μὴ συντετελεσμένων εἰς τὸ βασιλικὸν βυσσίνων ὀθ[ονίων. On the manufacture of ὀθόνιον (Suid. λεπτὸν ὕφασμα) see Otto Préester i. p. 300f., and cf. the Zeno letter PSI VI. 599 (iii/B.c.), where mention is made of 3 slaves and 1 woman as engaged on the manufacture of each ὀθόνιον. The word ὀθονιοπώλης,, ‘“a linen-seller,”’ is restored by Wilcken in P Leid 13 (B.c. 99) (=I. p. 52); for ὀθονιακός, ‘a…
Read the full entry →εἴδω (eidō) — to perceive: understand.
εἴδω,
no active present in use, ὁράω being used:—middle, see.below [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist 2 εἶδον always in sense of see (so in present and aorist 1 middle, to be seen, i.e. seem): but perfect οἶδα, in present sense, know. (With ἔ-ϝιδον, compare (ϝ) είδομαι, (ϝ) εῖδος, Latin videre; with (ϝ) οῖδα, cf. Sanskrit véda, Gothic wait, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] wát 'know'.)
__A aorist 2 εἶδον (late εἶδα [Refs 5th c.AD+]aorist to ὁράω, Epic dialect ἴδον, iterative ἴδεσκε [Refs 8th c.BC+], late Aeolic dialect εὔιδον [Refs]; imperative ἴδε (in Attic dialect written as adverb ἰδέ, behold! Hdn.Gr.2.23), ἴδετ; subjunctive ἴδω, Epic dialect ἴδωμι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative ἴδοιμ; infinitive ἰδεῖν, Epic dialect ἰδέει; participle ἰδών: hence, future ἰδησῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+] —middle, aorist 2 εἰδόμην, Epic dialect…
οἶδα οιδα ὁράω
eido
a primary verb; used only in certain past tenses, the others being
borrowed from the equivalent 3700 and 3708; properly, to see
(literally or figuratively); by implication, (in the perfect tense
only) to know:--be aware, behold, X can (+ not tell), consider, (have)
know(-ledge), look (on), perceive, see, be sure, tell, understand,
wish, wot. Compare 3700.
see GREEK for 3700
see GREEK for 3708
see GREEK for 3700
οἶδα
v.
I know, remember
Verb-2AAI-1S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · first person · singularsecond aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular
381 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 50 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 320 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 60 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τίς γὰρ οὐκ οἶδεν ὅτι πρῶτον μέν ἐστι σπορὰ καὶ φυτεία, δεύτερον δὲ τῶν σπαρέντων καὶ φυτευθέντων αὔξησις, ἡ μὲν εἰς τὸ κάτω ῥίζας ἀποτείνουσα οἱονεὶ θεμελίους, ἡ δ’ εἰς τὸ ἄνω πρὸς ὕψος αἰρομένων καὶ στελεχουμένων;
Προϊὼν δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς Μεσοποταμίας χρόνῳ παρῆν εἰς τὴν Χαρράν, καὶ ποιμένας ἐν τοῖς προαστείοις καταλαβὼν καὶ παῖδας ἐφήβους καὶ παρθένους ὑπέρ τινος ἱδρυμένους φρέατος συνδιέτριβεν αὐτοῖς χρῄζων ποτοῦ εἴς τε λόγους αὐτοῖς ἀφικνούμενος ἀνέκρινεν αὐτούς,…
οἶδεν ὁ τὴν ἔμφυτον δωρεὰν τῆς διδαχῆς αὐτοῦ θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν.
Πόρτιτος τῶν προκειμένων πάντων. ἔγραψεν Δρύτων Παμφίλου ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν διὰ τὸ φάσκειν αὐτοὺς μὴ εἰδέναι γράμματα. ἔτους λδ Τῦβι θ.
δίκης. ἔγραψεν ὑπὲρ τοῦ Ψεμμίνιος Διονύσιος Ἀρχεδήμου Βερενικεὺς ἀξιωθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ διὰ τὸ μὴ εἰδέναι γράμματα. ἔτους η Τῦβι κδ.
εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς Θηβαίδος. ὅπως οὖν εἰδότες εὐθαρσεῖς ὑπάρχητε ἐκρίναμεν σημῆναι. ἔρρωσθε ἔτους λ Φαῶφι ιθ
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
ἰδού,
[in LXX chiefly for הִנֵּה,]
prop. imperat. 2 aor. mid. of ὁράω, used as a demonstrative particle, with frequency much greater in LXX and NT than in cl. (v. M, Pr., 11),
ἰδού, a demonstrative particle, [in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down], found in the N. T. esp. in the Gospels of Matthew and of Luke, used very often in imitation of the Hebr. nan, and giving a peculiar vivacity to the style by bidding the reader or hearer to attend to what is said: behold! see! lo! It is inserted in the discourse after a gen. absol., Mt. i. 20; ii. 1, 13; ix. 18; xii. 46; xvii. 5; Xxvi.47; xxviii. 11. καὶ ἰδού is used, when at the close of a narrative something new is introduced, Mt. ii. 9; ili. 16; iv. 11; viii. 2, 24, 29,32, 34; ix. 2 54. 20; xii. 10; KV 224 ΧΥΙ- Ss) KIX. 10... eva. 91; ΧΧΥΪ. 51: ΧΧΥΤΙ ὦ, 7; Lk. i. 20, 31, 36; ii. 9[R GL Tr br. ], 25; ix. 30, 38 sq.; x. 25; xiv. 2; xxiv.13; Acts xii.7; xvi.1; when a thing is specified which is unexpected yet sure, 2 Co. vi. 9 (καὶ ἰδοὺ ζῶμεν, and nevertheless we live), cf. Mt. vii. 4; when a thing is specified which seems…
Read the full entry →ἰδού. Moulton (Pro/eg. p. 11) has shown that the frequency with which ἰδού (originally the imper. of εἰδόμην and accented ἰδοῦ) is used by certain NT writers is due to the fact that they were accustomed to the constant use of an equivalent interjection in their own tongue: cf. Wellhausen £ini.* p. 22. As showing, however, that the interjection was used in the Kou where no Hebraistic influence is predicable, we may cite P Oxy VII. 10665 (iii/A.p.) εἰδ[ο]ὺ οὖν ἀπέστιλά σοι αὐτήν, with reference to the return of a file, 76. 10691 (very illiterate—iii/a.p.) εἰδοὺ γὰρ kal τὸ πορφύρειν μετὰ τῶν συ[ν]έργων κεῖντε, “see, the purple is put with the tools” (cf. 1.5), 74. X. 12917 (A.D. 30) οὐδ[εί]ς μοι ἤνεγκεν ἐπιστολήν περὶ ἄρτων, ἀλλ᾽ εὐθέως, ἡ (-- εἰ) ἔπεμψας διὰ ἸΚολλούθου ἐπιστολήν, εἰδοὺ ἀρτάβηι σοι γίνεται, ‘“‘no one has brought me a letter about the bread, but if you send a letter by…
Read the full entry →ἰδού (idou) — look!.
ἰδοῦ
(ἴδου Hdn.Gr. cited in [Refs 4th c.AD+]aorist 2 imperative middle of ὁρά; but,
II. ἰδού (on the accent see Hdn.Gr.[Refs] adverb, lo! behold! (even with words of hearing, ἰδοὺ δοῦπον αὖ κλύω τινά [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.1. with Nouns and Prons., ἰ. χελιδών Klein [Refs 6th c.BC+], etc.; ἰ. ἐγώ here am I, [LXX+NT]; οὐκ ἰ. Ἀαρώ; [LXX]
II.2. with Verbs,
II.2. a in the imperative, ἰ. θεᾶσθε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially in offering a thing, take it! ἰ. δέχου παῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. b in indicative of all tenses, ἰ. πείθομαι [NT+5th c.BC+] with past tenses, [LXX+NT]; in the middle of a sentence, [NT]
II.3. with questions, ἰ., τί ἔστι; [Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἰδού
idou
second person singular imperative middle voice of 1492; used as
imperative lo!; --behold, lo, see.
see GREEK for 1492
ἰδού
v.
See! Lo! Behold! Look!
ἰδού 2nd sg mid imperat of εἰδόμην, as adv. lo! behold! see there! Soph.; ἰδού, δέχου there! take it! Lat. en tibi! id. Soph., etc.:— well, as you please! Ar.
in repeating another's words quizzingly, ἰδού γ᾽ ἄκρατον oh yes, wine, id. Ar.
Verb-2AMM-2S — Verb · second aorist · middle · imperative · second person · singularsecond aorist middle imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AMM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Middle Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular
208 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Counted over the 603 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
The Greek word ὄχλος (i.e., *ochlos*) refers to a moving crowd or multitude of people, often implying a throng or mob. It can denote the common people in a political sense, contrasting with the elite. The New Testament frequently uses it to describe gatherings of people, as seen in verses like Matthew 5:1 and John 7:49. The entries do not present significant disagreement.
ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ,
[in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), חַיִל, קָהָל, etc.;]
a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mt 9:23, Mk 2:4, Lk 5:1, Jo 5:13, al.; pl., Mt 5:1, Mk 10:1, Lk 3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mk 10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mt 15:33; οὐ μετ’ ὄχλου, Ac 24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Lk 22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Read the full entry →
ὄχλος, -ov, 6, in the N. T. only in the historical bks. and five times in the Rev.; asin Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down, a crowd, i. e. 1. a casual collection of people; a multitude of men who have flocked together in some place, a throng : Mt. ix. 23, 25; xv. 10, ete. ; Mk. ii. 4; iii. 9, and often; Lk. v. 1,19; vii. 9,ete.; Jn. v. 13; vi. 22, 24; vii. 20, 32,49, etc.; Actsxiv. 14; xvii. 8; xxi. 34; τὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, Lk. xi. 27; xii. 13; or ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου, xix. 39; ix. 38; ἀπὸ (for 1. 6. on account of [ef. ἀπό, 11. 2b.]) τ. ὄχλου, Lk. xix. 3; ἡ βία τ. ὄχλου, Acts xxi. 35; πολὺς ὄχλος and much oftener ὄχλος πολύς, Mt. xiv. 14; xx. 29; xxvi.47; Mk. v. 21, 24; vi. 34; ix. 14; xiv. 43 [here T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. oh. ]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; ix.37; Jn. vi. 2,5; xii. 12 [but here Tr mrg. br. WH prefix 6; cf. B. 91 (80)]; Rev. xix. 1,6; with the art. ὁ πολὺς ὄχλ.» the great…
Read the full entry →ὄχλος. In P Petr II. 4 (6)!® (B.c. 255-4) an official complains that on his way to work he had been hustled, and that, if care is not taken, he will be assaulted—8ivdv γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλωι ἀτιμάζεσθαι, ‘for it is a dreadful thing to be insulted before a crowd” (Ed.), and in 26. 4.51}. 23 (B.c. 246) ἄλλος ὄχ[λος ἐστεφ]ανωμένος is distinguished from various officials. A striking parallel to Mk 15%® (noted by the editor) is afforded by P Flor I. 618 (A.D. 85) (= Chest. II. p. 89), where the Egyptian Governor addresses a certain Phibion, who had been tried before him, in the words—&g.os μ[ὲ]ν ἧς μαστιγωθῆναι. . . χαρίζομαι δέ σε τοῖς ὄχλοις, ‘you deserved to be scourged, but I hand you over to the multitude.” [Note the use of ὄχλος in the plur., as frequently in Mt (e.g. 42°), with apparently the same meaning as the sing.] A Gnostic charm of iti/iv A.D., P Oxy XII. 1478, contains the…
Read the full entry →ὄχλος (ochlos) — crowd.
ὄχλος, ὁ,
crowd, throng, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄ. τῶν στρατιωτῶν the mass of the soldiers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὄχλῳ in numbers (for an army), [Refs]; οἱ τοιοῦτοι ὄ. undisciplined masses like these,[Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of the camp-followers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. in political sense, populace, mob, opposed to δῆμος (people), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δικαστηρίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὄ. and popular assemblies (in a contemptuous sense), [Refs 5th c.BC+] this is already in the mouths of the people, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
3. generally, mass, multitude, ὄ. τὸν πλεῖστον λόγων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵππων ὄ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in plural, the masses, καχεξία τις ὑποδέδυκε τοὺς ὄχλους [Refs 4th c.BC+]
ὄχλος
ochlos
from a derivative of 2192 (meaning a vehicle); a throng (as borne
along); by implication, the rabble; by extension, a class of people;
figuratively, a riot:--company, multitude, number (of people), people,
press.
see GREEK for 2192
ὄχλος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
a crowd
ὄχλος ὄχλος, ὁ, a moving crowd, a throng, mob, Pind., Aesch., etc.; ὁ ὄχλος τῶν στρατιωτῶν the mass of the soldiers, Xen.; τῷ ὄχλῳ in point of numbers, Thuc.; οἱ τοιοῦτοι ὄχλοι undisciplined masses like these, id. Thuc.
in political sense, the populace, mob, Lat. turba, opp. to δῆμος, id. Thuc., Xen.
generally, a mass, multitude, ὄχλος λόγων Aesch.
like Lat. turba, annoyance, trouble, ὄχλον παρέχειν τινί to give one trouble, Hdt.; δι᾽ ὄχλου εἶναι, γενέσθαι to be or become troublesome, Ar., Thuc.
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
176 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 174 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὸ λαῶδες καὶ ὄχλον ἔχον ἐν ἡμῖν μέρος,
καὶ ὁ Ἡσαῦς ἀσπασάμενος αὐτὸν ἀνήρετο τῶν παίδων τὸν ὄχλον καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας, ἠξίου τε τότε μαθὼν περὶ αὐτῶν τὸ πᾶν καὶ αὐτὸς συμβαδίζειν αὐτοῖς πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Ἰακώβου δὲ προφασιζομένου τὸν κόπον τῶν ὑποζυγίων ὑπεχώρησεν εἰς Σάειραν·
ἕτεροι δὲ ἤρχοντο τὰς ῥάβδους χλωρὰς φέροντες ὡς ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου: τὸ δὲ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου τοιαύτας ῥάβδους ἐπεδίδουν.
ἐάν τι ἀκούσῃς περὶ ἡμῶν τῶν σουκεσσόρων ἀντίγραψόν μοι. ἐκόμισα κι… ον επεν… μὴ ὀχλοῦ … εραν
ἐλυπήθην ἀκούσας ὅτι ἤκουσας. οὐ γὰρ δεινῶς ἠσθένησα. μέμφομαι δὲ τὸν εἴπαντα σοι. μὴ ὀχλοῦ δὲ πέμπειν τι ἡμῖν. ἐκομισάμεθα δὲ τὰ θαλλία παρὰ τοῦ τοῦ Ἡρακλείδου. Διονυτᾶς δὲ
τρεῖς. ἐὰν δὲ πέμπω ἕνα οὐκέτι ἔχω πέμψαι εἰς τὴν λατομίαν. οἶδας δὲ ὅτι ὄχλον πολὺν δαπανᾶ εἰς τὴν κατάστασιν. ἐγὼ δ …τα τὰ παρʼ ἐμε … … ηκα
πολύς (polus) means much or many, covering a range of contexts from quantity to degree and value. It appears as an adjective and can also function as a noun or adverb. In the New Testament, it is used to describe large numbers of people or things, as seen in verses like Matthew 9:37 and John 6:10. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.
πολύς, πολλή, πολύ,
[in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms;]
as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Ac 11:21; ὄχλος, Mk 5:24; θερισμός, Mt 9:37; χόρτος, Jo 6:10; χρόνος, Mt 25:19; γογγυσμός, Jo 7:12; πόνος, Col 4:13; δόξα, Mt 24:30; σιγή, Ac 21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mt 13:17; ὄχλοι, Mt 4:25; δαιμόνια, Read the full entry →
πολύς, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλός, found in Hom., Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for 39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc., many, numerous, great: ἀριθμός, Acts xi. 21; λαός, Acts xviii. 10; ὄχλος, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.; πλῆθος, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; 1. q. abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], καρπός, Jn. xii. 24; xv. 5,8; θερισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt. ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; χόρτος, Jn. vi. 10; οἶνος, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. πολλοὶ τελῶναι, Mt. ix. 10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοὶ προφῆται, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26; πατέρες, 1 Co. iv. 15; δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58, ete.; ὄχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but here L TWH om. Trbr. ὄχ.7; Lk. v. 15, ete.; δαιμόνια, Mk.i. 34; and in many otherexx.; with…
Read the full entry →πολύς, “much,” plur. ‘‘many’’: P Petr I. 2905 (iii/B.c.) χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς πολλὴ εἰ ὑγιαίνεις, ‘‘much thanks to the gods if you are well,” P Ryl II. 2435 (ii/A.D.) τοῦτο οὐ μόνον ἡμεῖν yevapevov ἀλλὰ Kal πολλοῖς, ‘this has happened not to us only but to many ” (Edd.), and 16. 238* (A.p. 262) διὰ πολλὰς χρείας, “for various needs’ (Edd.). The word is very conimon in epistolary greetings (πολλὰ χαίρειν : exx. from B.C. 118 to ili/iv A.D. in Exler Eprstolography p. 27 f.) and in rhetorical prefaces (Sirach proem.), and consequently, as Cadbury suggests (in Jackson and Lake Beginnings of Christianity Part I. Vol. ii. p. 492 f.), πολλοί must not be pressed to mean “ἡ Ac 243, 10, For the adverbial πολλά, which ‘‘ lies between πολύ and πολλάκις : it is ‘much’ with the idea of plurality and repetition introduced’’ (Hort ad Jas 32), cf. P Heid 622 (iv/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 127) πολλὰ…
Read the full entry →πολύς (polus) — much.
πολύς,
Attic dialect πολλή, πολ; genitive πολλοῦ, ῆς, ou=; dative πολλῷ, ῇ, ; accusative πολύν, πολλήν, πολύ:—Ionic dialect πολλός [Refs 6th c.BC+], πολλή, πολλόν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; also in Trag., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πολλόν, πολλήν, πολλόν: [Refs 5th c.BC+] uses the Ionic dialect forms, but codices have πολύν [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—both sets of forms are found in Epic dialect, also genitive singular πολέος [Refs 8th c.BC+], once contraction πολεῖς [Refs]; dative πολέσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative πολέας (trisyllable) [Refs 8th c.BC+] (frequently with variant{πολεῖς} [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in later Epic dialect πολέες is used as feminine, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect also have πουλύς (once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; these forms are found in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+] — Lyric poetry and Trag. (Lyric poetry) sometimes use Epic dialect forms, dative singular…
Read the full entry →πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
Adj
much, many, often
πολύς polys 416x
great in magnitude or quantity, much, large, Mt. 13:5; Jn. 3:23; 15:8; pl. many, Mt. 3:7; in time, long, Mt. 25:19; Mk. 6:35; Jn. 5:6; οἱ πολλοί, the many, the mass, Rom. 5:15; 12:5; 1 Cor. 10:33; τὸ πολύ, much, 2 Cor. 8:15; πολύ, as an adv., much, greatly, Mk. 12:27; Lk. 7:47; of…
Read the full entry →πολύς the ionic declension πολλός, ή, όν is retained by the attic in all cases, except the nom. and acc. masc. and neut. Hom. uses both ionic and attic forms. of Number, many, opp. to ὀλίγος, Hom., etc.;— with nouns of multitude, πουλὺς ὅμιλος Od.; πολλὸν πλῆθος Hdt., etc.:—also of anything often repeated, πολλὸν ἦν τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος id. Hdt.; πολλὸς αἰνεόμενος id. Hdt.; τούτῳ πολλῷ χρήσεται τῷ λόγῳ often, Dem.
of Size, Degree, Force, much, mighty, great, Il., etc.; π. ὕπνος deep sleep, Od.; π. ὑμέναιος a loud song, Il., etc.:—rarely of a single person, μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο Hdt.; ἢν πολλῇ ῥυῇ if she flow with full stream, metaph. from a river, Eur.; πολλῷ ῥέοντι Dem.; from the wind, πολὺς ἔπνει was blowing strong, id. Dem.; often with a Partic., πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος…
Read the full entry →Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
378 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 354 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 335 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
τῶι προγεγραμμένωι ἱερῶι, ὁ ἐνκεκλημένος προσπηδήσας μοι ἐνώπιόν τινων ἔτυπτεν ἧι εἶχεν ῥάβδωι πληγαῖς πλειόσιν εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματός μου. ὅ τε περιεβλήμην, ὀθόνιον κατέρηξεν, περὶ ὦν
νυνὶ παρεφεδρευόντων ἐν Διὸς πόλει τῆι μικρᾶι ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῶι ἐν Πτολεμαίδι ὑπαίθρωι. πολλὰς χρείας μισθοφόρων ἱππέων παρεσχημένων ἡμῶν ἤδη πολλάκις κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον καὶ κινδύνους μεγάλους
μέρους ἡμίσους ἀπὸ ἐδάφους ἀμπελῶνος ἀρουρῶν β ἡμίσους ἢ ὅσαν ἂν ἦι ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον καὶ τοῦ ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου αὐτοῦ παραδείσου καὶ φρεάτων καὶ ἐποικίων καὶ ληνῶνος καὶ γῆς
ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,
the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).
As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →
ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…
Read the full entry →ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…
Read the full entry →ὅς (hos, hē) — which.
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,
genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,
__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.
__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…
ὅς ἥ ὅ
hos
he hay, and neuter
ho ho
probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the
relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,
that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),
etc. See also 3757.
see GREEK for 3588
see GREEK for 3757
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
Rel.pr.
who, which, what, that
ὅς hos 1x
who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16
Rel-ASM — Relative pronoun · accusative · singular · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
R-ASM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·
πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.
Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…
θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση
ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν
τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην
The Greek word ἀριθμέω (i.e., *arithmeō*) means to number or count. It is used in various contexts, including for payment and enumeration, as seen in verses like Matthew 10:30 and Luke 12:7. The word is built from the root for 'number' and covers a range of counting applications. Notably, Moulton & Milligan emphasize its use in financial contexts.
ἀριθμέω, -@: 1 aor. ἠρίθμησα; pf. pass. ἠρίθμημαι: (ἀριθμός) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to number: Mt. x. 30; Lk. xii. 7; Rev. vii. 9. [Comp.: κατ-αριθμέω.
ἀριθμέω. The ordinary use of the verb is for ‘“‘payment”: cf. P Giss 1. 85 (A.D. 119) τὴϊν συμ]φωνηθεῖαν (1. -σαν) τιμὴν τῷ ᾿Απολλωνίῳ ἀρ[ιθ]μήσας, 1 Oxy IIT. 486% (a.p. 131) ἀριθμήσασα τιμὴν αὐτῶν, P Lille 1. 34 (ifter B.c. 240) καλῶς ποι(ήσεις) [συ]ντάξας ἀρ[ι]θμῆσαι ἡμῖν τὸ γινόμενον ὀψώνιον] τοῦ «Λωίο[υ μ]ηνός, α΄. In P Leid ΟἹ 19 (p, 118) (the dream of Ptolemaeus, ii/B.C.) οἴομαι ἀρειθμεῖν με seems to refer to ‘‘counting” days: ten lines higher the verb means ‘*pay.” BGU II. 6205 (ii/A.D.) ἠριθμήθημεϊν has a
ἀριθμέω (arithmeō) — to number.
ἀριθμ-έω [ᾰ],
imperfect ἠρίθμεον as trisyllable, [Refs 8th c.BC+], 3rd.pers.singular ἠρίθμει[Refs]:—middle, aorist ἠριθμησάμην[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, future middle in passive sense ἀριθμήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; future ἀριθμηθήσομαι[LXX+2nd c.AD+]aorist infinitive ἀριθμηθήμεναι (for -ῆναι) [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—number, count, reckon up, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ δίχα πάντας.. ἑταίρους ἠρίθμεον counted them so as to halve them, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀριθμήσαντες after numbering the army, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδεὶς πώποτ᾽.. ἠρίθμησε stopped to count the enemy, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —middle, ἠριθμοῦντο counted each for himself, πλίνθους[Refs 5th…
Read the full entry →ἀριθμέω
arithmeo
from 706; to enumerate or count:--number.
see GREEK for 706
ἀριθμέω
v.
I number, count
ἀριθμέω ἀριθμός to number, count or reckon up, Od., etc.:—Mid., ἠριθμοῦντο they got them counted, Thuc.
to count out, to pay, Xen., Dem.
to reckon, count as, ἐν εὐεργεσίας μέρει id. Dem.:—Pass. to be reckoned, ἔν τισι Eur.; ἀριθμεῖσθαι τῶν φιλτάτων to be counted as one of one's dearest friends, id. Eur.
Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitiveaorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658
num'-ber:
I. NUMBER AND ARITHMETIC
II. NOTATION OF NUMBERS
1. By Words
2. By Signs
3. By Letters
III. NUMBERS IN OLD TESTAMENT HISTORY
IV. ROUND NUMBERS
V. SIGNIFICANT NUMBERS
1. Seven and Its Multiples
(1) Ritual Use of Seven
(2) Historical Use of Seven
(3) Didactic or Literary Use of Seven
(4) Apocalyptic Use of Seven
2. The Number Three
3. The Number Four
4. The Number Ten
5. The Number Twelve
6. Other Significant Numbers
VI. GEMATRIA
LITERATURE
I. Number and Arithmetic.
The system of counting followed by the Hebrews and the Semites generally was the decimal system, which seems to have been suggested by the use of the ten fingers. Hebrew had separate words only for the first nine units and for ten and its multiples. Of the sexagesimal system, which seems to have been introduced into Babylonia by the Sumerians and which, through its development there, has influenced the measurement of time and space in the…
Like most Oriental nations, it is probable that the Hebrews in their written calculations made use of the letters of the alphabet. That they did so in post-Babylonian times we have conclusive evidence in the Maccabaean coins; and it is highly probable that this was the ease also in earlier times. But though, on the one hand, it is certain that in all existing MSS of the Hebrew text of the Old Testament the numerical expressions are written at length, yet, on the other, the variations in the several versions between themselves and from the Hebrew text, added to the evident inconsistencies in numerical statement between certain passages of that text itself seems to prove that some shorter mode of writing was originally in vogue, liable to be misunderstood, and in fact misunderstood by copyists and translators. These variations appear to have proceeded from the alphabetic method of writing…
Isa 65:11. See GAD 3.
3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 27 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
οὐδείς is built from the negation οὐ (not) and εἷς (one), meaning no one or none. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, often emphasizing the absence of people or things, such as in Matthew 5:13 and John 1:18. The word can also be used adverbially to mean not at all or nothing.
οὐδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (also in WH, txt., the Hellenistic forms -θείς, -θέν, Lk 22:35 23:14, Ac 15:9 19:27 26:26, I Co 13:2, II Co 11:8; cf. Bl., § 6, 7; M, Pr., 56n, Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to μηδείς as οὐ to μή,
no, no one, none: with nouns, Lk 4:24, Jo 10:41, Ro 8:1, al.; absol., Mt 6:24, Mk 3:27, Lk 1:61, Jo 1:18, Ac…
Read the full entry →οὐδείς. P Alex 4° (iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski’, p. 52), οὐδείς σε ἀνθρώπων μὴ ὠφειλήσηι. For a similar use of οὐθείς, cf. P Petr 11. 13(19)!8 (B.c. 258-3) (= Witkowski?, p. 20) τοῦτο {δ᾽ ἔχε τῆι δια[νοία]ι, ὅτι οὐθέν σοι μὴ γενηθῆι λυπηρόν, ἀλλὰ πᾶν ἐμοὶ ἔστ]αι πεφροντισμένον τοῦ σε γενέσθαι ἄλυπον, ‘‘but hold this fact in your mind, that nothing vexatious may happen to you, but that I have used every forethought to keep you free from trouble’’ (Ed.). Another ex. of the neut. οὐδέν is the illiterate BGU II. 380" (ili/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 105) οὐδὲν περισότε[ρ]ον ext σε. οὐδ΄ ποτε “there is nothing so much the matter with you.’’ The stronger οὐδέν is sometimes used for οὐ : see Epict. iv. ro. 36 οὐδὲν κωλύονται ἀθλιώτατοι εἶναι Kal δυστυχέστατοι (cited by Radermacher G7. p. 26), and possible NT exx. in Ac 18! (but cf. Blass Gr. p. 104), Rev 377, The usual accumulation of negatives may be…
Read the full entry →οὐδείς (oudeis) — none.
οὐδείς,
feminine οὐδεμίᾰ (never nominative accusative -μίη, -μίην, since οὐδεμιῇ is probably in [Refs], rarely οὐδ᾽ ἴα [Refs 7th c.BC+], not one, i.e. no one, none, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+], except in the phrase τὸ ὃν μένος οὐδενὶ εἴκων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδείς is found in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rare in plural, no set of persons or things, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδένων εἰσὶ βελτίους, i.e. οὔ τινων ἄλλων, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —In _Ionic dialect_ the _plural_ is usually οὐδαμοί.
2. οὐ. ὅστις οὐ every one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐ every, [Refs]; this came to be regarded as one word, so that οὐδείς passed into the same case as ὅστις, οὐδένα ὅντινα οὐ κατέκλασε [Refs 5th…
οὐδείς οὐθείς
oudeis
oudemia oo-dem-ee'-ah, and neuter
ouden oo-den'
from 3761 and 1520; not even one (man, woman or thing), i.e. none,
nobody, nothing:--any (man), aught, man, neither any (thing), never
(man), no (man), none (+ of these things), not (any, at all, -thing),
nought.
see GREEK for 3761
see GREEK for 1520
οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν
Adj
no one, none, nothing
οὐδείς oudeis 227x
latter form, οὐθείς (G4032), not one, no one, none, nothing, Mt. 5:13; 6:24; 19:17; met. οὐδέν, nothing, of no account, naught, Jn. 8:54; Acts 21:24
οὐδείς never οὐδεμίη and not one, i. e. no one, none, as Lat. nullus, for ne ullus, Hom., etc.:—rare in pl. (οὐδαμοί being used instead), Xen.; πρὸς οὐδένας τῶν Ἑλλήνων Dem.; v. infr. II. 3.
οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ, Lat. nemo non, every one, Hdt., attic; οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐ, Lat. nihil non, every, Hdt.; this came to be regarded as one word, so that οὐδείς passed into the same case as the relative, οὐδένα ὅντινα οὐ κατέκλασε Plat.
naught, good for naught, Ar.
in neut. of persons, οὐδέν εἰμι Hdt.; πρὸς τὸν οὐδένα Eur.; οὐδὲν εἶναι to be good for nothing, Ar.
in pl., οὐδένες ἐόντες being nobodies, Hdt.; ὄντες οὐδένες Eur.; ὁ μηδὲν ὢν κἀξ οὐδένων κεκλήσομαι id. Eur.
Adj-NSM-N — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
A-NSM-N Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine Negative
wun.
See NUMBER.
235 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 235 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 113 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τὸ μὲν οὖν κάλλος τῶν νοημάτων τῆς κοσμοποιίας οὐδεὶς οὔτε ποιητὴς οὔτε λογογράφος ἀξίως ἂν ὑμνῆσαι δύναιτο·
ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.
διὸ προσέχωμεν ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις: οὐδὲν γὰρ ὠφελήσει ἡμᾶς ὁ πᾶς χρόνος τῆς πίστεως ἡμῶν, ἐὰν μὴ νῦν ἐν τῷ ἀνόμῳ καιρῷ καὶ τοῖς μέλλουσιν σκανδάλοις, ὡς πρέπει υἱοῖς θεοῦ, ἀντιστῶμεν, ἵνα μὴ σχῇ παρείσδυσιν ὁ μέλας.
Φιλωτέρειον Δρύτωνι Παμφίλου ὄντα συγγενῆ, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ Ἐσθλάδου τοῦ Ἐσθλάδου. Ἀλλωι δὲ οὐθενὶ οὐθὲν καταλείπω οὐδε δίδωμι. Μαρτυρες … … … … δεξι … … μελίχρως τετανὸς
ς δεομένων δὲ τῶν … ντων ὑμῶν διαλήψεως … καὶ οὐδὲ μέχρι τοῦ νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα … θαι ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι
καὶ Φάφις καὶ οἱ παρʼ ἡμῖν πάντες. μὴ λυπεῖσθε ἐπὶ τοῖς χωρισθεῖσι. ὑπελάμβανον φονευθήσεσθαι. οὐθὲν ἡμῖν κακὸν ἐποίησεν ἀλλʼ ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων ἐπιμεμέληται, περὶ ὧν, ἐὰν αἱρῆτε, γράψατέ μοι.
δύναμαι, transliterated as dunamai, means 'to be able' or 'to have power.' It can refer to personal ability, permission, or opportunity. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 6:24 and Mark 2:7. The lexicons indicate that it can be used with an infinitive or an accusative, but there is some variation in the forms and usages noted in different sources.
δύναμαι, depon.,
[in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;]
to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: c. inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, § 44, 3) pres., Mt 6:24, Mk 2:7, Jo 3:2, I Co 10:21, al.; c. inf. aor., Mt 3:9, Mk 1:45, Jo 3:3, 4 Ro 8:39, al.; c. acc., to be able to do something: Mk 9:22, Lk 12:26; II Co 13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: Read the full entry →
δύναμαι, depon. verb, pres. indic. 2 pers. sing. δύνασαι and, acc. to a rarer form occasional in the poets and fr. Polyb. on to be met with in prose writ. also (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 359; [ WH. App. p.168; W.§ 18, 2b.; Veitch 8. v.]), δύνῃ (Mk. ix. 22 sq. L T Tr WH; [Lk. xvi. 2 T WH Tr txt. ]; Rey. ii. 2); impf. ἐδυνάμην and Attic ἠδυνάμην, between which forms the Mss. and editions are almost everywhere divided, [in Mk. vi. 19; xiv. 5; Lk. Vili. 19; xix. 3; Jn. ix. 33; xii. 39 all edd. read 78., so RG in Mt. xxvi. 9; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; Rev. xiv. 3; on the other hand, in Mt. xxii. 46; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; Rey. xiv. 3, L T Tr WH all read ἐδ., so T WH in Mt. xxvi. 9; RGin Mt. xxii. 46. Cf. WH. App. p. 162; W. § 12, 1b.; B. 83 (29) ]; fut. δυνήσομαι ; 1 aor. ἠδυνήθην and (in Mk. vii. 24 T WH, after codd. 8B only; in Mt. xvii. 16 cod. B) ἠδυνάσθην (cf. [WH τι. 5. and p. 169]; Kiihner §…
Read the full entry →δύναμαι. The following exx. of this common verb may be cited— P Par 471° (c. B.C. 153) (= Selections, p. 22) ἐνβέβληκαν (sc. οἱ θεοὶ) ὑμᾶς εἰς ὕλην μεγάλην Kal οὗ δυνάμεθα ἀποθανεῖν, ““they have cast us into a great forest, where we may possibly die,” P Oxy IV. 743% (B.c. 2) οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν ᾿Α., “1 was unable to meet A.,” 26. 7γ4413 (B.c. 1) [ΞΞ Selections, p. 33) πῶς δύναμαί σε ἐπιλαθεῖν ; ‘how can I forget you?”, P Lond 144™ (?i/a.p.) (ΞΞ 11. p. 253) ἵνα δυνηθῇ τὸ παιδάριόν μου ἐλθεῖν mpd[s ple, P Oxy LIT. 47218 (4 A.D. 130) οὐ δύναται γὰρ κεκλέφθαι τὸ μηδ᾽ ἀρχὴν γενόμενον μὴ δυνατὸν δ᾽ εἶναι, ‘for it is impossible for that to have been stolen which neither ever existed at all nor could exist” (Edd.). It takes an ace. ve? (as in Lk 1255) in P Ryl IL. 7758 (A.p. 192) οὐ yap δύναμαι κοσμητείαν. In P Leid {50 (ii/B.c.) ἔφη δύνασθαι τὰ ἔργα πάντα ἐπιτελέσιν ἐν ἡλι (?—was ὀλίγαις…
Read the full entry →δύναμαι (dunamai) — be able.
δύνᾰμαι [ῠ],
2nd pers. singular δύνασαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect δύνᾳ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; δύνῃ is subjunctive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural δυνέαται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive δύνωμαι, Ionic dialect 2nd pers. singular δύνηαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect 2nd pers. singular ἐδύνω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἐδυνέατο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future δυνήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect δυνᾱσοῦμαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐδυνησάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect δυν- [Refs]; subjunctive δυνήσωνται [Refs 7th c.BC+], never in good Attic dialect, falsa lectio in [Refs 4th c.BC+]passive forms, Epic dialect, Ionic dialect, Lyric poetry, ἐδυνάσθην or δυνάσθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect Prose ἐδυνήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect δεδύνημαι [Refs 4th c.BC+] —The double…
Read the full entry →δύναμαι
dunamai
of uncertain affinity; to be able or possible:--be able, can (do, +
-not), could, may, might, be possible, be of power.
δύναμαι
v.
I am powerful, am able
δύναμαι decl. in pres. and imperf. like ἵσταμαι Dep.
to be able, capable, strong enough to do, c. inf., Hom., etc.; but the inf. is often omitted, Ζεὺς δύναται ἅπαντα [sc. ποιεῖν] Od.; so also, μέγα δυνάμενος very powerful, mighty, id. Od.; οἱ δυνάμενοι men of power, Eur., Thuc.; δυνάμενος παρά τινι having influence with him, Hdt., etc.
to be able, i. e. to dare or bear to do a thing, οὐδὲ ποιήσειν δύναται Od.; οὐκέτι ἐδύνατο βιοτεύειν Thuc.
with ὡς and a Sup., ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότατα as secretly as they could, id. Thuc.; ὡς δύναμαι μάλιστα as much as I possibly can, Plat.; or simply ὡς ἐδύνατο in the best way he could, Xen.
to pass for, i. e.
Verb-INI-3S — Verb · imperfect · no voice stated · indicative · third person · singularimperfect no voice stated indicative — a continuing action in past time.
V-INI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
a'-b'-l: The Greek dunamai, "to have power," may refer either to inherent strength, or to the absence of in external obstacles, or to what may be allowable or permitted. The Greek ischuo, as in Lu 13:24; Joh 21:6, refers always to the first of the above meanings. The use of the word as an adjective the King James Version of 2Co 3:6, is misleading, and has been properly changed in the Revised Version (British and American) into "sufficient as ministers," i.e. "hath fitted us to be ministers."
207 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 33 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 209 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 159 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὗ χάριν τῆς ἀρίστης αὑτοῦ φύσεως οὐκ ἐφθόνησεν οὐσίᾳ μηδὲν ἐξ αὑτῆς ἐχούσῃ καλόν, δυναμένῃ δὲ πάντα γίνεσθαι.
Σάρρα δὲ γεννηθέντα τὸν Ἰσμαῆλον ἐκ τῆς δούλης αὐτῆς Ἀγάρης τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἔστεργεν οὐδὲν ἀπολείπουσα τῆς πρὸς ἴδιον υἱὸν εὐνοίας, ἐτρέφετο γὰρ ἐπὶ τῇ τῆς ἡγεμονίας διαδοχῇ, τεκοῦσα δʼ αὐτὴ τὸν Ἴσακον οὐκ ἠξίου παρατρέφεσθαι τούτῳ τὸν Ἰσμαῆλον ὄντα…
Δεῖ οὖν ἡμᾶς περὶ τῶν ἐνεστώτων ἐπιπολὺ ἐραυνῶντας ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δυνάμενα ἡμᾶς σώζειν.
τε ἐπιμελόμενος ἵνα ὑγιαίνηις καὶ ἡμῖν γράφων ἐάν τί σοι βούληι γίνεσθαι ὧν ἡμεῖς δυνάμεθα. καλῶς δʼ ἂν ποιήσαις ἀγοράσας ἡμῖν ἵνα ὡς ἂν παραγενώμεθα ἔχωμεν μέλιτος τοῦ βελτίστου
φόρωι τοῦ λζ ἔτους, συνφωνήσας Ἡρακλείδης μετὰ Θοτέως αὐτοὶ ἄνευ ἡμῶν διελογίσαντο καὶ οὐ δυνάμεθα παρακολουθῆσαι τί πεποιήκασιν ἕως τοῦ νῦν, οὐδὲ αἰτούμενοι τὸν λόγον ἐτόλμησαν ἡμῖν δοῦναι. καὶ
τι καταπεφύτευκεν ἀμπέλωι, κατεγνωκὼς τῶι γυναῖκας ἡμᾶς εἶναι καὶ ἑτέρωι τόπωι κατοικούσας μὴ εὐχερῶς δύνασθαι ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν σημαινομένην κτῆσιν. Διὸ καταπεφευγυῖαι ἐπὶ σὲ, ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, μεταπεμψάμενον αὐτὸν
The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.
ἐκ (ἐξ),
prep. c. gen.,
from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,
prep. c. gen.,
of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.
Of Place,
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…
Read the full entry →ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…
Read the full entry →ἐκ (ek) — out from.
ἐκ,
before a vowel ἐξ, also
__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.
__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:
__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἐκ
ek
or ex ex
a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or
motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or
figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,
betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),
for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X
heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,
off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,
through,
X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,
with the same general import; often of completion.
ἐκ, ἐξ
Prep.
from out, out from among, from
ἐκ ek 915x
ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →
ἐκ
ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:
out of, from. c. gen.
OF PLACE:
of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.
to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.
to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.
of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.
with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
The Greek word πᾶς (i.e., *pas*) means 'all' or 'every' and appears in various forms, including masculine, feminine, and neuter. It is used in the New Testament to denote totality, as in 'all things' or 'every kind,' and can function as an adjective or pronoun. Notably, it can also imply 'the whole' when used with definite articles, as seen in verses like Matthew 28:18.
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, gen., παντός, πάσης, παντός,
[in LXX chiefly for כֹּל;]
all, every.
As adj.,
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, en. παντός, πάσης, παντός, [dat. plur. Lchm. πᾶσι ten times, -σιν seventy-two times; Tdf. -σι five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -ow seventy-seven times; Treg. -ow eighty-two times; WH -ox fourteen times, -ow sixty-eight times; see N, v (ἐφελκυστικόν)], Hebr. 75, [fr. Hom. down], all, every; it is used I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous nouns; a. any, every one (86. of the class denoted by the noun annexed to mas); with the Singular: as πᾶν δένδρον, Mt. iii. 10; πᾶσα θυσία, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v.11; xv. 13; Lk. iv. 37; Jn.ii. 10; xv.2; Acts ii.43; v.42; Ro. xiv. 11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἀνθρώπου, Ro. ii. 9 (πᾶσα ἀνθρ. ψυχή, Plat. Phaedr. p- 249e.); πᾶσα συνείδησις ἀνθρώπων, 2 Co. iv. 2; mas λεγόμενος θεός, 2 Th. ii. 4; πᾶς ἅγιος ἐν Χριστῷ, Phil. iv. 21sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are…
Read the full entry →παῖς. In Gnomon 41 (¢. A.D. 150) it is laid down—éav Αἰγύπτιος ἐκ κοπρίας [ἀν]έληται παῖδα καὶ τοῦτον υἱοποιήσηται, μετὰ θάνατον τεταρτολο[ γεῖτ]αι, ““1Γ an Egyptian shall take up a child from the dungheap, and adopt him as a son, he shall be mulcted after his death to the extent of one fourth of his property.” For παῖς applied to a female child see P Strass I. 41° (A.D. 250) ἐκδικῆσαι τὰ τῆς παιδός, and P Oxy 1 5215 (A.D. 325) εΠδαμὲν τὴν παῖδα ἔχουσαν κατὰ τῶν εἰσχίων ἀμυχὰς μετὰ πελιωμάτων (see 76. II. p. 319), ““νγῈ saw that the girl had wounds on her hips with livid spots”: cf. Lk 8° (for voc. of address see Pro/eg. pp. 70, 235). The word is commonly applied to slaves, as in Lk 77 a/., e.g. P Lille 27 (iii/B.c.), where 11 male slaves are enumerated under the heading παῖδες, then 2 female slaves, and then again 3 male slaves: cf. P Strass I. 405 (a. p. 569) Κολλοῦθος Βίκτορος…
Read the full entry →πᾶς (pas) — all.
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν,
__AAeolic dialect παῖς, παῖσα [Refs 7th c.BC+] feminine πάνσα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Delph. πάντεσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also Locrian dialect πάντεσιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντοις [Refs 2nd c.BC+] as accusative masculine in [LXX+7th c.BC+], etc. (but in compounds sometimes long in Attic dialect, [Refs].]—Coll. pronoun, when used of a number, all; when of one only, the whole; of the several persons in a number, every.
__A.I in plural, all, πάντες τε θεοὶ πᾶσαί τε θέαιναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντες ὅσοι.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντας ᾧ ἂνπεριτυγχάνῃ, for ὅσοις ἄν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with the Article, see.below [Refs 5th c.BC+]
πᾶς
pas
including all the forms of declension; apparently a primary word; all,
any, every, the whole:--all (manner of, means), alway(-s), any (one),
X daily, + ever, every (one, way), as many as, + no(-thing), X
thoroughly, whatsoever, whole, whosoever.
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν
Adj
all, the whole, every kind of
πᾶς pas 1x
all; in the sg. the whole, entire, usually when the substantive has the article, Mt. 6:29; 8:32; Acts 19:26; every, only with an anarthrous subst., Mt. 3:10; 4:4; pl. all, Mt. 1:17, et al. freq.; πάντα, in all respects, Acts 20:35; 1 Cor. 9:25; 10:33; 11:2; by a Hebraism, a negative with πᾶς is sometimes equivalent to οὐδείς or μηδείς, Mt. 24:22; Lk. 1:37; Acts 10:14; Read the full entry →
Adj-GSN — Adjective · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
A-GSN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
1,264 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 28 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,242 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
27 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
καὶ γὰρ πατὴρ ἐκγόνων καὶ δημιουργὸς τῶν δημιουργηθέντων στοχάζεται τῆς διαμονῆς καὶ ὅσα μὲν ἐπιζήμια καὶ βλαβερὰ μηχανῇ πάσῃ διωθεῖται, τὰ δὲ ὅσα ὠφέλιμα καὶ λυσιτελῆ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον ἐκπορίζειν ἐπιποθεῖ·
ὡς οἱ Νώχου ἔγγονοι πᾶσαν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐπῴκησαν.
πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:
γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντων πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς
ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ
χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.
The Greek word ἔθνος (i.e., *ethnos*) refers to a multitude or a nation, often distinguished from the Jewish people. It can denote a company of individuals or animals and is frequently used in the New Testament to refer to Gentiles or non-Jews. The term appears in various contexts, including Acts and Matthew, where it highlights the distinction between Jews and other nations.
ἔθνος, -ους, τό; 1. a multitude (whether of men or of beasts) associated or living together ; a company, troop, swarm: ἔθνος ἑταίρων, ἔθνος ᾿Αχαιῶν, ἔθνος λαῶν, Hom. 1]. ; ἔθνος μελισσάων, 2,87; μυιάων ἔθνεα, ib. 469. 2. α multitude of individuals of the same nature or genus, (τὸ ἔθνος τὸ θῆλυ ἢ τὸ ἄρρεν, Xen. oec. 7, 26): πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων, the human race, Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation: Mt. xxi. 43; Acts x. 35, ete.; ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος, Mt. xxiv. 7; ΜΚ. xiii. 8; οἱ ἄρχοντες, of βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mt. xx. 25; Lk. xxii. 25; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people, Lk. vii. δ; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53; xviii. 35; Acts x. 22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10; xxvi. 4; xxviii. 19. 4. (ra) ἔθνη, like 0127 in the O. T., foreign nations not worshipping the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [ οἴ. Trench § xeviii.]: Mt. iv. 15 (Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7…
Read the full entry →ἔθνος. Hicks in CR i. p. 42f. has shown that ‘‘ Hellenic life found its normal type in the πόλις, and barbarians who lived κατὰ κώμας or in some less organised form were ἔθνη,᾽᾿ and that similarly in the LXX and NT ἔθνος ‘‘ describes the pagan world, outside the Jewish Church,’’ but occasionally stands for the λαός itself, as in Ac 107%, 2477 α΄. In an Impenial rescript of a.p. 198-201 we have a good example of the word = ‘‘ province’ —P Oxy VII. 1020° ᾧ ἡγούplevos] τοῦ ἔθνους τὸν ἀγῶνα τῆς ἀφέσεως ἐκδικ[ήσει, “the praefect of the province shall decide the suit for release” (Ed.): cf. P Strass I. 2219 (iii/A.p.) διατάξεις εἰσὶν τῶν κυρίων περὶ τῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν οἰκούντων, where the editor understands by ἔθνη, ‘“‘provinctae populé Romani,” and the exx. from Greek writers of this usage in Magie p. 59, dA7chzv i. p. 66: see also Deissmann Pax/, p. 100. In the edict regarding the aurum…
Read the full entry →ἔθνος (ethnos) — Gentiles.
ἔθνος, εος, τό:
(ϝέθνος,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: - number of people living together, company, body of men, ἑτάρων ἔ., ἔ. ἑταίρων, band of comrades, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔθνος λαῶν host of men, [Refs]; of particular tribes, Αυκίων μέγα ἔ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of animals, ἔ. μελισσάων, ὀρνίθων, μυιάων, swarms, flocks, etc., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἀνέρων, γυναικῶν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. βρότεον, θνατόν, [Refs]; ἔ. τόδε, of the Erinyes, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. after [Refs 8th c.BC+], nation, people, τὸ Μηδικὸν ἔ. (γένος being a subdivision of ἔθνος) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἠπειρογενές, μαχαιροφόρον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἔθνος
ethnos
probably from 1486; a race (as of the same habit), i.e. a tribe;
specially, a foreign (non-Jewish) one (usually, by implication,
pagan):--Gentile, heathen, nation, people.
see GREEK for 1486
ἔθνος, ους, τό
n.n.
a race, people, the Gentiles
ἔθνος ethnos 162x
a multitude, company, Acts 17:26; 1 Pet. 2:9; Rev. 21:24; a nation, people, Mt. 20:25; 21:43; pl. ἔθνη, from the Hebrew, nations or people as distinguished from the Jews, the heathen, Gentiles, Mt. 4:15; 10:5; Lk. 2:32
ἔθνος ἔθνος, εος, ἔθω a number of people accustomed to live together, a company, body of men, Il., etc.; ἔθνος λαῶν a host of men, id. Il.; also of animals, swarms, flocks, id. Il., Soph.
after Hom., a nation, people, Hdt., etc.:—in NTest. τὰ ἔθνη the nations, Gentiles, i. e. all but Jews and Christians.
a special class of men, a caste, tribe, Plat., Xen.
sex, id. Xen.
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 162 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 509 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἐπειδὴ γὰρ πορεύεται ἡ ὑπομονητικὴ ψυχὴ Ῥεβέκκα πυθέσθαι παρὰ θεοῦ, ἀποκρίνεται αὐτῇ, ὅτι „δύο ἔθνη ἐν τῇ γαστρί σού ἐστι, καὶ δύο λαοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας σου διασταλήσονται, καὶ λαὸς λαοῦ ὑπερέξει, καὶ ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι“ (Gen.
ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.
λάβε πάλιν: Ἰδού, λέγει κύριος, πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἀπερίτμητα ἀκροβυστίαν, ὁ δὲ λαὸς οὗτος ἀπερίτμητος καρδίας.
ὁ κύριος ἡμῶν … τοῦτο τὸ ἔθνος … λομενον πυ … εισθαι πρ … … ἐντολῆς … … εἰδῶσι ἔτους κϛ
ἀδελφῇ … χαίρειν. … μικρὸν παιδίον … ς φοινίκων … αν αὐτὸν ὡς … ἔθνη κoινὰν … μηχανῶν ἢ ἐρι… ἐπεὶ γὰρ χρείαν σου ἔχω … ἀσπάσασθαι. ἀπο
ἀπολαβεῖν σε τὴν νομὴν τῶν χωρὶς συνβάσεως κατεχομένων πρὸς βίαν χωρίων ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ ἔθνους κελεύσει … … θαλγη Ἀμβρήλου διὰ Ἀβδομάνχου υἱοῦ. ἀργύριον γυναῖκες δανίζεσθαι καὶ ὑπὲρ ἄλλων
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
φυλή (phulē) refers to a tribe or clan, often associated with kinship or local habitation. It encompasses the twelve tribes of Israel, as well as broader groups of people and nations. The New Testament uses it in contexts relating to the tribes of Israel (e.g., Matthew 19:28) and the nations of the earth. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meaning.
φυλή, ῆς, ἡ
[in LXX chiefly for; מַטֶּה, also for שֵׁבֶט, מִשְׁפָּחָה, etc. ;]
a body of men united by kinship or habitation, a clan or tribe: of the tribes of Israel, Mt 19:28, Lk 2:36 22:30, Ac 13:21, Ro 11:1, Phl 3:5, He 7:13, 14, Ja 1:1, Re 5:5 7:4-8 21:12; of the tribes of the earth, the peoples and nations, Mt 24:30, Re 1:7 5:9 7:9 11:9 13:7 14:6.†
φυλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. φύω), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ; aL a tribe; in the N.T. all the persons descended from one of the twelve sons of the patriarch Jacob (Sept. for 792 and viv; also for NMSwWN, see πατριά, 2): Heb. vii. 13 sq-; with the addition of the genitives ᾿Ασήρ, Βενιαμίν, ete., Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. χὶ. 1 ; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. νυ. 5; vii. 5-8; δώδεκα φ. τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Jas.i. 1; Rev. xxi. 12; [πᾶσα φυλὴ υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, Rev. vii. 4]. 2. a race, nation, people: Mt. xxiv. 30; Rev. [i. 7]; v.9; vii. 9; [xi.9]; xiii. 7; xiv. 6.
φυλή, “‘a tribe,” especially one of the twelve tribes of Israel (Mt τοῦ a/.), and extended by analogy to the tribes of the earth (Mt 24%° a/.). For the priestly tribes in Egypt, cf. P Tebt II. 2998 (c. A.D. 50), where a certain Psoiphis, τῶν ἀ[πὸ THs κώ]μης πέμπτη[ς φυλῆς] ἱερέος (1. ἱερέως) τῶν ἐν [τῇ κώμῃ] θεῶν, ““ priest of the fifth tribe of the gods at the village,” asks that the birth of a son be registered, P Kyl Il. 179° (A.D. 127) Πακῦσις . . . ἱερεὺς πρώτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου, and similarly %*7, See further Otto Priester i. p. 23 ff. In Claudius’s address to the Alexandrines P Lond 19124! (A.D. 41) a φυλὴ Κλαυδιανά, not known elsewhere, is mentioned : see the editor’s note, where reference is made to Schubart Archiv v. p. 94f. for the Alexandrian tribenames of the Roman period. Cf. also Preisigke Fachworter 5.U.…
Read the full entry →φυλή (phulē) — tribe.
φῡλή, ἡ,
(φύω) properly, like{φῦλον}, a race, tribe; but accusative to [Refs 4th c.BC+] a union formed in an organized community (whether πόλις or ἔθνος): hence, tribe, i.e.
I. a body of men united
I.1. by supposed ties of blood and descent, clan, such as the three Dorian tribes, Rhetra cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the four Ionic tribes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the Laconian, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the old Roman, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; of the Persian, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the Jewish, [LXX] (but also of subdivisions of the tribe (σκῆπτρον),[LXX+NT]
I.2. by local habitation, such as the ten local tribes at Athens formed by Cleisthenes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or those formed by Servius at Rome, φ. τοπικαί, opposed to γενικαί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.3. subdivision of the priests in each Egyptian temple, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]
φυλή
phule
from 5453 (compare 5444); an offshoot, i.e. race or clan:--kindred,
tribe.
see GREEK for 5453
see GREEK for 5444
φυλή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
a tribe, race
φυλή φυ_λή, ἡ, φύω like φῦλον, a race or tribe of men, κατὰ φυλάς Xen.
a body of men united by ties of blood and descent, a clan, such as those among the Dorians (φ. γενική), Pind.; of the four old Attic Tribes, Hdt., Eur.; of the Jewish, NTest.
a tribe connected by local habitation, like our hundred or county, such as the ten local tribes at Athens formed by Cleisthenes (φ. τοπική), Hdt., etc.—The subdivisions of the φυλαὶ γενικαί were φρατρίαι, those of the φυλαὶ τοπικαί were δῆμοι.
the contingent of soldiers furnished by a tribe, Hdt., Thuc., etc.:—later, a brigade of cavalry, Xen.; cf. φύλαρχος II.
Noun-GPF — Noun · genitive · plural · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
N-GPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 185 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„Δὰν κρινεῖ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ λαόν, ὡσεὶ καὶ μία φυλὴ Ἰσραήλ, καὶ γενέσθω Δὰν ὄφις ἐφ’ ὁδοῦ, ἐγκαθήμενος ἐπὶ τρίβου, δάκνων πτέρναν ἵππου, καὶ πεσεῖται ὁ ἱππεὺς εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, τὴν σωτηρίαν περιμένων κυρίου“ (Gen.
εἰσὶ δὲ οὗτοι, οἳ τὸ τῶν Ἀράβων ἔθνος καὶ τὰς φυλὰς ἀπʼ αὐτῶν καλοῦσι διά τε τὴν ἀρετὴν αὐτῶν καὶ τὸ Ἁβράμου ἀξίωμα.
οἱ ῥαντίζοντες παῖδες οἱ εὐαγγελισάμενοι ἡμῖν τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ τὸν ἁγνισμὸν τῆς καρδίας, οἷς ἔδωκεν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τὴν ἐξουσίαν ʽοὖσιν δεκάδυο εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν φυλῶν ὅτι δεκάδυο φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ̓, εἰς τὸ κηρύσσειν.
τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογεῖ Πακῦσις Στοτοήτεως πρεσβυτέρου τοῦ Πανεφρίμεως ἱερεὺς πρώτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου μεγάλου ὡς ἐτῶν μα οὐλὴ βραχίωνι ἀριστερῶι τῷ ἑαυτοῦ ὁμοπατρίωι καὶ
κωμογραμματεῖ Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου παρὰ Πανεφρέμμεως Ἀγχώφεως πρεσβυτέρου Πανεφρέμμεως μητρὸς Στοτοήτεως τῆς Ὥρου ἱερέως τρίτης φυλῆς ἀπὸ κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου. ἀπογράφομαι ἐμαυτόν τε καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς εἰς τὴν τοῦ διεληλυθότος
τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογεῖ Στοτοῆτις πρεσβύτερος Στοτοήτεως τοῦ Στοτοήτεως ἱερεὺς τετάρτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου ὡς ἐτῶν ξδ οὐλὴ μετόπῳ μέσῳ Ἐρειεῦτι Πανεφρέμμεως τοῦ Στοτοήτεως ἱερείᾳ
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
λαός (laos) refers to a people or crowd, often distinguished from rulers or leaders. It is used in various contexts, including the assembly of people, the common folk, and specifically the people of Israel in the New Testament, as seen in Matthew 27:25 and Luke 2:10. The term can also denote the Christian community as the people of God, contrasting with non-believers.
λαός, -ov, ὁ, [(cf. Curtius § 535)]; Sept. more than fifteen hundred times for Dy; rarely for ‘42 and px); [fr. Hom. down]; people; 1. a people, tribe, nation, all those who are of the same stock and language: univ. of any people; joined with γλῶσσα, φυλή, ἔθνος, Rev. v. 9; vii. 9; x.11; xi. 9; xiii. 7 [Ree. om.]; xiv. 6; xvii. 15, (see γλῶσσα, 2); πάντες of λαοί, Lk. ii. 31; Ro. xv. 11; esp. of the people of Israel: Mt. iv. 23; xiii. 15; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. ii. 10; Jn. xi. 50 (where it alternates with ἔθνος) ; xviii. 14; Acts iii. 23; Heb. ii. 17; vii. 11, ete.; with Ἰσραήλ added, Acts iv. 10; distinguished fr. τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, Acts xxvi. 17, 23; Ro. xv. 10; the plur. λαοὶ Ἰσραήλ [R. V. the peoples of Is.] seems to be used of the tribes of the people (like oD), Gen. xlix. 10; Deut. xxxii. 8; Is. iii. 13, ete.) in Acts iv. 27 (where the plur. was apparently occasioned by Ps. ii. 1 in its…
Read the full entry →λαός. In the papyri λαοί is the regular term for ‘‘ natives,” “‘fellaheen.” Thus in P Petr II. 4(11)* (B.c. 255-4) we hear of a salt-tax imposed τοῖς ἐκ Κερκεήσιος λαοῖς, where the editor remarks, ‘‘an ancient and poetical form for Jeople found both in the LXX and in Papyri’’: cf. P Lille I. 168 (iii/B.C.) ἐπειδὴ καὶ ἀπεργάζονται οἱ λαοὶ Td κέρμα τοῦτο εἰς ἄριστον, ‘since the natives are working off (?) this small tax as well as they can,” P Par 631% (B.c. 164) (=P Petr III. p. 26) τοὺς πλείστους δὲ τῶν ἐν ταῖς κώμαις κατοικούντῶν λαῶν οἵ διὰ τὴν τῶν δεόντων σπάνιν ἐργατεύοντες πορίἵονται τὰ πρὸς τὸ ζῆν, ‘also most of the people inhabiting the villages, who, through lack of necessaries, supply themselves with the means of life by hard labour’? (Mahaffy), z}. 15. τῶν μὲν ταλαιπώρων λαῶν καὶ τῶν μαχίμων Kal τῶν ἄλλων ἀδυνατούντων φείσεσθε, ‘you must spare the miserable populace and the…
Read the full entry →λαός (laos) — a people.
λᾱός, ὁ,
Ionic dialect ληός [Refs 6th c.BC+] (variant{λαόν}, which is in all Mss. in [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Attic dialect λεώς, which is also used in [Refs 5th c.BC+] and in late Prose, as Foed.Byzantine cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]
1. in [Refs 8th c.BC+] (λαοί) usually means men, i.e. soldiers, both of the whole army and smaller divisions, κριτὸς ἔγρετο λ. Ἀχαιῶν [Refs]; periphrastic, στρατὸς λαῶν[Refs]; mostly including both foot and horse, as [Refs]; but sometimes λαός denotes foot, as opposed to horse, [Refs]; also, a land army, opposed to a fleet, [Refs]; also, the common men, opposed to their leaders, [Refs]; but
2. in [Refs 8th c.BC+], almost always means men or people; as subjects of a prince, e.g. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λαοὶ ἀγροιῶται country-folk, [Refs]; work-people, [Refs]; of sailors, [Refs…
λαός
laos
apparently a primary word; a people (in general; thus differing from
1218, which denotes one's own populace):--people.
see GREEK for 1218
λαός, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
a people, the crowd
λαός λα_ός, οῦ, ionic ληός, attic λεώς: —, the people, both in sg. and pl., i. e.
in the warlike language of Il., the people or men of the army, soldiers; also a land-army, opp. to a fleet; the common men, opp. to their leaders
in the peaceful Od., men, people; so, ναυτικὸς λεώς seafaring folk, Aesch.; ὁ γεωργικὸς λεώς Ar.; ἀκούετε, λεῴ hear o people! the usual way of beginning proclamations at Athens, like our oyez! id. Ar.
in NTest. of Jews, and later of Christians, as opp. to heathens.
Noun-GPM — Noun · genitive · plural · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
N-GPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
143 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 142 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 929 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„καὶ ἀπέστειλε κύριος εἰς τὸν λαὸν τοὺς ὄφεις τοὺς θανατοῦντας.
μετʼ οὐ πολὺν δὲ χρόνον μεταναστὰς καὶ ἀπὸ ταύτης τῆς χώρας σὺν τῷ σφετέρῳ λαῷ εἰς τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν λεγομένην νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν μετῴκησε καὶ οἱ ἀπʼ ἐκείνου πληθύσαντες, περὶ ὧν ἐν ἑτέρῳ λόγῳ διέξειμι τὰ ἱστορούμενα.
εἰς τοῦτο οὖν, ἀδελφοί, ὁ μακρόθυμος προβλέψας, ὡς ἐν ἀκεραιοσύνῃ πιστεύσει ὁ λαός, ὃν ἡτοίμασεν ἐν τῷ ἠγαπημένῳ αὐτοῦ, προεφανέρωσεν ἡμῖν περὶ πάντων, ἵνα μὴ προσρησσώμεθα ὡς ἐπήλυτοι τῷ ἐκείνων νόμῳ.
τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ἐδάνεισεν Ἀπύγχις πρεσβύτερος Στοτοήτιος νεωτέρου ὡς ἐτῶν κ οὐλὴ ἀντικνήμιον ἀριστερὸν Λαου … ε … ευς Πέρσῃ τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν πεντήκοντα οὐλὴ πήχει δεξιῷ καὶ
Σισευ … … … Ἁρπήκου Σις … … Σανσνεῦς … … … Β … λαων Β … … … … … … πεντευ … … … … … ορ
παρὰ τοῦ … ειρ … φιλοσόφου … λάῳ ἐξα … … τας ἀρχ … κοντα η … ἄνελθε
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
γλῶσσα refers primarily to the tongue as the organ of speech, but it also denotes language and, in some contexts, a group of people defined by their language. The New Testament uses it in various ways, including references to speaking in tongues (Acts 2:11) and the metaphorical use of the tongue in discussions of speech and communication. Notably, it appears in contexts related to spiritual gifts and the expression of praise.
γλῶσσα, -ns, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], the tongue ; 1. the tongue, a member of the body, the organ of speech: Mk. vii. 88, 35; Lk. i. 64; xvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Jas. i. 26; iii. 5, 6, 8; 1 Pet. iii 10; 1 Jn. iii. 18; [Rev. xvi. 10]. By a poetical and rhetorical usage, esp. Hebraistic, that member of the body which is chiefly engaged in some act has ascribed to it what belongs to the man; the tongue is so used in Acts ii. 26 (Πγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά pov); Ro. iii. 13; xiv.11; Phil.ii. 11 (the tongue of every man) ; of the little tongue-like flames symbolizing the gift of foreign tongues, in Acts ii. 3. 2. a tongue, i. 6. the language used by a particular people in distinction from that of other nations: Acts ii. 11; hencein later Jewish usage (Is. Ixvi. 18; Dan. iii. 4; v. 19 Theod.; vi. 25; vii. 14 Theod.; Jud. iii. 8) joined with φυλή, λαός, ἔθνος, it serves to designate people of various…
Read the full entry →γλῶσσα. Most of the occurrences of this noun, which retains both form and meaning in MGr, need no particular comment. P Oxy I. 138 (A.D. 183 or 215) saefe, the monthly meat bill of a cook, tells us that ‘*‘tongue”’ was a favourite article of diet ; so also the numerous passages in inscrr. where in the ritual of sacrifice the victim’s tongue is mentioned as a special perquisite. The word figures prominently in magical documents. P Lond 1245} (iv/v A.p.) (=I. p. 122) βάλλε εἰς αὐτὸ γλῶσσαν βαθράκου shows whe frog’s tongue playing the same part as ‘‘ tongue of dog” in the witches’ spell in Macbeth: so also τό. 46°84 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 74). There are niany curses which ‘*‘ hind” the tongue of their object : thus Syd/ $08 (Corcyra) Σιλανοῦ τὸν νόον kal τὰν γλῶσσαν τουτεῖ KaTaypadw—Silanus himself and three witnesses who enabled him to win a suit are cursed with this leaden tablet in mind and…
Read the full entry →γλῶσσα (glōssa) — tongue.
γλῶσσα,
Ionic dialect γλάσσα, [Refs 3rd c.BC+], Attic dialect γλῶττα, ης, ἡ, tongue, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
__b γ. λάρυγγος, ={γλωττίς}, larynx, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
2. tongue, as the organ of speech, γλώσσης χάριν through love of talking, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γλώσσῃ δεινός, θρασύς, [Refs 5th c.BC+] by frankness of speech, [Refs 6th c.BC+], of fraud opposed to violence, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, by word of mouth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ γλώσσης ἄπο, i.e. our words, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπὸ γ. φράσω by heart, opposed to γράμμασιν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώσσης not from mere word of mouth, but after full argument, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; μὴ διὰ γλώσσης without using the tongue, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —phrases: πᾶσαν γλῶτταν βασάνιζε try every art of tongue, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πᾶσαν ἱέναι γλῶσσαν let loose one's whole tongue, speak…
γλῶσσα
glossa
of uncertain affinity; the tongue; by implication, a language
(specially, one naturally unacquired):--tongue.
γλῶσσα, ης, ἡ
n.f.
the tongue, a language, nation
γλῶσσα glōssa 50x
the tongue, Mk. 7:33, 35, et al.; meton. speech, talk, 1 Jn. 3:18; a tongue, language, Acts 2:11; 1 Cor. 13:1, et al.; meton. a language not proper to a speaker, a gift or faculty of such language, Mk. 16:17; 1 Cor. 14:13, 14, 26, et al.; from Hebrew, a nation, as defined by its language, Rev. 5:9, et al.; lit. a tongue-shaped flail, Acts 2:3
γλῶσσα deriv. uncertain the tongue, Hom., etc.
the tongue, as the organ of speech, γλώσσης χάριν through love of talking, Hes., Aesch.; ἀπὸ γλώσσης by word of mouth, Hdt., Thuc.; οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώσσης not by word of mouth, not from mere hearsay, Aesch.; so, οὐ κατὰ γλῶσσαν Soph.; ἱέναι γλῶσσαν to let loose one's tongue, speak without restraint, id. Soph.; pl., κερτομίοις γλώσσαις, i.e. with blasphemies, id. Soph.:—for βοῦς ἐπὶ γλώσσηι, v. βοῦς.
a tongue, language, Hom., Hdt., etc.
the tongue or mouthpiece of a pipe, Aeschin.
Noun-GPF — Noun · genitive · plural · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
N-GPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
50 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 50 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 69 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἑπτὰ δὲ νοῦν καὶ γλῶσσαν ἐν ἑβδομάσιν μέγ’ ἄριστος ὀκτώ τ’, ἀμφοτέρων τέσσαρα καὶ δέκ’ ἔτη·
ταῦτα δʼ ἔλεγον πρὸς ἀλλήλους οὐχ ἡγούμενοι τὸν Ἰώσηπον γλώσσης τῆς αὐτῶν συνιέναι.
καὶ πάλιν λέγει: Ἠγάπησαν αὐτὸν τῷ στόματι αὐτῶν καὶ τῇ γλώσσῃ αὐτῶν ἐψεύσαντο αὐτόν, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν οὐκ εὐθεῖα μετ̓ αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἐπιστώθησαν ἐν τῇ διαθήκῃ αὐτοῦ.
Μενεμάχωι ὅτι οὐκ ἐγδείρας ἀποστέλλει πρὸς σὲ αὐτούς. τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ ὅσα κατὰ τὴν γλῶσσαν παρακαλεῖν ἐκέλευέν σε κ … εἶναι πρὸς τοῖς ἔργοις τοῖς παρὰ σοὶ εὐτονώτερον
rColumn 1 Θὼθ δ κδ ἔτους, κρέως μναῖ δ, ἄκρα β, γλῶσσα μία, ῥυγχίον α. ϛ, γλωσσοπωγώνιον. ια, κρέως μναῖ β, γλῶσσα μία, νεφρία β. ιβ,
θῆναι … … ου γλωσση … … διὰ20 στόματος … … ἐν καμίνῳ … … ἐγκώμια … ι
The Greek word ἵστημι (*histēmi*) means to make to stand or to set up, and can also refer to standing or being placed. It is used in various contexts, including appointing, establishing, and standing firm. The New Testament employs this term in verses like Mark 7:9 and Acts 1:23. There is some variation in its forms, with less frequent alternatives like ἱστάω and ἱστάνω noted in the lexicons.
ἵστημι, and in late writers, also ἱστάνω (Veitch, s.v.; Bl., § 23, 2; M, Pr., 55),
[in LXX chiefly for עמד, קוּם, also for נצב ni., hi., יצב hith., etc.].
Trans, in pres., impf., fut. and 1 aor. act. and in the tenses of the pass.
ἵστημι, more rarely ἱστάω ([({ν. Hdt. down; cf. Veitch s. v.)] ἱστῶμεν, Ro. iii. 31 RG) and ἱστάνω ([(late; cf. Veitch s. v.)] ἱστάνομεν, Ro. iii. 31 LT Tr WH), [ef. B. 44 (38) sq.; W. § 14, 1f.; 87 (83); WH. App. p. 168; Veitch p. 337 sq. |; fut. στήσω; 1 aor. ἔστησα; 2 aor. ἔστην; impv. στῆθι, inf. στῆναι, ptep. στάς ; pf. ἔστηκα [with pres. force; W. 274 (257)], inf. ἑστάναι [15 }2 5 νες G Tr -avae in Acts xii. 14] (nowhere ἑστηκέναι), ptep. mase. ἑστηκώς with neut. ἑστηκός, and in the shorter form ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα (Jn. viii. 9), with neut. ἑστώς and (LT Tr WH in Mt. xxiv. 15 [here R
ἵστημι (histēmi) — to stand.
ἵστημι
(compare ἱστάω, ἱστάνω),
I. causal, make to stand, imperative ἵστη [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect ἵστην, Epic dialect ἵστασκε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἵσταν [Refs 5th c.BC+]future στήσω, Doric dialect στᾱσῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἔστησα, Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἔστᾰσαν for ἔστησαν uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 middle ἐστησάμην (never intransitive)[Refs 4th c.BC+]: perfect ἕστᾰκα [LXX+5th c.BC+]; also ἕστηκα (see. below) in transitive sense, (δι-) [LXX+4th c.BC+] [same place]; ἑστακεῖα transitive in [Refs]
II. intransitive, stand,
II.1. active, aorist 2 ἔστην, Epic dialect στάσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστησαν, more frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative στῆθι, Doric dialect στᾶθι [Refs…
ἵστημι
histemi
a prolonged form of a primary stao stah'-o (of the same meaning, and
used for it in certain tenses); to stand (transitively or
intransitively), used in various applications (literally or
figuratively):--abide, appoint, bring, continue, covenant, establish,
hold up, lay, present, set (up), stanch, stand (by, forth, still, up).
Compare 5087.
see GREEK for 5087
ἵστημι
v.
I cause to stand, stand
ἵστημι histēmi 154x
pluperfect, ἑστάμην, also formed as στήκω 10x, trans. to make to stand, set, place, Mt. 4:5; to set forth, appoint, Acts 1:23; to fix, appoint, Acts 17:31; to establish, confirm, Rom. 10:3; Heb. 10:9; to set down, impute, Acts 7:60; to weigh out, pay, Mt. 26:15; intrans. to stand, Mt. 12:46; to stand fast, be firm, be permanent, endure, Mt. 12:25; Read the full entry →
ἵστημι for σίστημι, redupl. from ΣΤΑ Causal Tenses, to make to stand, Lat. sisto,
intr. to stand, Lat. sto,
Causal, to make to stand, set, Hom., etc.:— to set men in array, post them, Il., Xen.
to make to stand, stop, stay, check, Hom., etc.; στῆσαι τὴν φάλαγγα to halt it, Xen.; στ. τὰ ὄμματα to fix them, of a dying man, Plat.; ἵ. τὸ πρόσωπον, Lat. componere vultum, Xen.
to set up, ἱστ. ἱστόν to set up the loom, or to raise the mast, Hom.; to raise buildings, statues, trophies, etc., Hdt., attic; ἱστάναι τινὰ χαλκοῦν to set him up in brass, raise a brasen statue to him, Dem.
to raise, rouse, stir up, Hom., etc.; φυλόπιδα στήσειν to stir up strife, Od.; in aor1 mid., στήσασθαι μάχην id. Od.
Verb-RAP-APM — Verb · perfect · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
V-RAP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
155 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 54 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 153 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 345 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
πολλαὶ δὲ καρτερίας καὶ σωφροσύνης ἐρασθεῖσαι ψυχαὶ καὶ ἐρημωθεῖσαι παθῶν ὅμως κράτος ὑπέμειναν θεοῦ καὶ τροπὴν τὴν πρὸς τὸ χεῖρον ἐδέξαντο, διασυνιστάντος αὑτόν τε καὶ τὴν γένεσιν τοῦ δεσπότου, ἑαυτὸν μέν, ὅτι ἀκλινὴς ἕστηκεν ἀεί, τὴν δὲ γένεσιν,…
εἶτα πρὶν στῆναι τὸν βωμὸν οἰωνῶν ἐφιπταμένων ἐπιθυμίᾳ τοῦ αἵματος φωνὴ θεία παρῆν ἀποσημαίνουσα πονηροὺς αὐτοῦ τοῖς ἐγγόνοις γείτονας ἐπὶ ἔτη τετρακόσια γενησομένους κατὰ τὴν Αἴγυπτον·
λαμβάνει δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν τριῶν δογμάτων γνῶσιν Δαυείδ καὶ λέγει: Μακάριος ἀνήρ, ὃς οὐκ ἐπορεύθη ἐν βουλῇ ἀσεβῶν, καθὼς καὶ οἱ ἰχθύες πορεύονται ἐν σκότει εἰς τὰ βάθη: καὶ ἐν ὁδῷ ἁμαρτωλῶν οὐκ ἔστη, καθὼς οἱ δοκοῦντες φοβεῖσθαι τὸν κύριον ἁμαρτάνουσιν…
ἀρχιπροφήτης ἀπέστειλά σοι. αἱ μὲν οὖν προσήκουσαι αὐτῷ τάξεις φυλαχθήτωσαν ὥσπερ οἱ πρὸ ἐμοῦ ἔστησαν κατὰ τὸ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἔθος. πρὸς δὲ τοὺς κακῶς ὑπεσχημένους ἀναλημφθήτωσαν αἱ δοθεῖσαι ὑπʼ
κράτιστον ἡγεμόνα τὸν στρατηγὸν … … τα εἶναι ἄχρηστα καὶ δηλῶσαι το … γὰρ σταθήσεται … … γεναμένῳ διαλογισμῷ τὸν στρατηγήσαντα Πτο … … … κέναι καὶ δεδηλωκέναι τίνα
σέ, ἐγώ τε καταδεής εἰμι καθὼς ἐκ τῆς ὄψεως ὁρᾷς, οὐ δύναμαι … … στηναι τηλικαύτης τῆς … … … … … ακαιαφ … … … … επις
The Greek word ἐνώπιον (i.e., *enopion*) means 'before' or 'in the presence of.' It is derived from a combination of prepositions and a term meaning 'face.' This word is often used in the New Testament, particularly in the writings of Luke and Revelation, to indicate being in the sight of someone, especially God, as seen in verses like Romans 14:22 and Revelation 1:4.
† ἐνώπιος, -ον
(< ὤψ),
[in LXX for פָּנִים, etc. ;]
face to face, in sight (Theocr.; ἄρτοι ἐ., Ex 25:29): neut., ἐνώπιον, in vernacular, with force of prep. c. gen. [in LXX for לְעֵינֵי, לִפְנֵי, etc., cf. Dalman, Words, 31 f., 209 f., and Deiss., BS., 213], in NT, most freq. in Lk, Ac, Re, never in Mt, Mk, before, in the presence of: Lk 1:19 4:7, Ac 4:10 6:5, Re 1:4 2:14, al.; esp. ἐ. Κυρίου (θεοῦ), in the sight of God, or with God as witness or as judge, Ro 14:22, I Co 1:29, I Ti 2:3, Ja 4:10, I Pe…
ἐνώπιον, neut. of the adj. ἐνώπιος, -ov, (i. 4. ὁ ἐν ὠπὶ ὦν, one who is in sight, Theocr. 22, 152; Sept. Ex. xxxiii. 11; ἄρτοι ἐνώπιοι, Ex. xxv. 29); used adverbially it gets the force of a preposition [W. § 54,6; B. 319 (274)], and is joined with the gen. (hardly to be found so in any prof. auth.), before, in sight of any one ; time and again in Sept. for .)}3 and +99, also for 33) and 33375 among N. T. writ. used most freq. by Luke and the auth. of the Rev., but never by Matthew and Mark. It is used 1. of occupied place: in that place which is before, or over against, opposite, any one and towards which another turns his eyes; @. prop.: εἶναι ἐνώπ. τινος, Rev. i. 4; vii. 15; [xiv. 5 Rec.]; so that εἶναι must be mentally supplied before ἐνώπιον, Rev. iv. 5 sq.; viii. 3; ix.13; after στῆναι, Acts x. 30; ἑστηκέναι, Rev. vil. 9; viii. 2; xi. 4; xii. 4; xx. 12; παρεστηκέναι, Lk. i. 19…
Read the full entry →ἐνώπιον. To Deissmann's proof (BS p. 213) that this word belongs to the vernacular, and is not to be treated as a new formation of ‘* biblical” Greek, much additional evidence can now be added from iii/B.c. onwards. The earliest ex. of the word known to us, P Hib J. 3055 (before B.c. 271), is unfortunately followed by a lacuna—y δίκη σου ἀναγραφήσετ[α]ι ἐν [τῶι ἐν Ἡρ]ακλέους πόλει δικαστηρίωι [ἐ]νῴπιον [. .. ., **the case will be drawn up against you in the court at Heracleopolis in the presence of . . .” (Edd.). Wilcken’s translation of BGU II. 5781 (a.p. 189) μετάδ(ος) ἐνώπι(ον), “deliver personally” (cited by Deissmann z¢ szfra) finds an exact parallel in P Tebt I. 141% (B.c. 114) παρηγγελκότες ἐνώπι[ον, “1 gave notice in person "᾿ (Edd,), P Flor I. 567° (A.D. 234) μετέδωκ(α) Avpnd((w) . . ἐνώπιον ὡς καθήκει. For the prepositional use with the gen. see P Lond 35° (B.c. 161) (=I. p.…
Read the full entry →ἐνώπιον (enōpion) — before.
ἐνώπ-ιος, ον,
(ὤψ) facing, to the front, πρό τ᾽ ἐνώπια [Refs 7th c.BC+]face to face, [LXX]; ἄρτοι ἐ. shewbread, [Refs]; διαστολῶν γεγονυιῶν ὑμῖν καὶ ἐνοπίοις (sic) καὶ διὰ γραμμάτων in person, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
II. neuter ἐνώπιον as adverb, face to face, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; in person, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]: as preposition with genitive, [NT+4th c.BC+]. Regul. adverb -ίως[Refs]
ἐνώπιον
enopion
neuter of a compound of 1722 and a derivative of 3700; in the face of
(literally or figuratively):--before, in the presence (sight) of, to.
see GREEK for 1722
see GREEK for 3700
ἐνώπιον
Adv
before the face of, in the presence of
ἐνώπιον enōpion 94x
gen., before, in the presence of, Lk. 5:25; 8:47; in front of, Rev. 4:5, 6; immediately preceding as a forerunner, Lk. 1:17; Rev. 16:19; from the Hebrew, in the presence of, metaphysically, i.e. in the sphere of sensation or thought, Lk. 12:9; 15:10; Acts 10:31; in the eyes of, in the judgment of, Lk. 16:15; 24:11; Acts 4:19
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
be-for': The translation of a great variety of Hebrew and Greek words. "Haran died before (the English Revised Version "in the presence of," literally "before the face of") his father Terah" (Ge 11:28). To be "before" God is to enjoy His favor (Ps 31:22). "The Syrians before" (Isa 9:12 the Revised Version, margin "on the east," as "behind," owing to the position of Canaan, relative to Syria, implies the west).
95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 94 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 148 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι ὁ Ἀβραὰμ „ἔτι ἦν ἑστηκὼς ἐνώπιον κυρίου καὶ ἐγγίσας εἶπε Μὴ συναπολέσῃς δίκαιον μετὰ ἀσεβοῦς“ (Gen.
καὶ ἴδωμεν, τί καλὸν καὶ τί τερπνὸν καὶ τί προσδεκτὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ ποιήσαντος ἡμᾶς.
Καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι δὲ εὔσπλαγχνοι, εἰς πάντας ἐλεήμονες, ἐπιστρέφοντες τὰ ἀποπεπλανημένα, ἐπισκεπτόμενοι πάντας ἀσθενεῖς, μὴ ἀμελοῦντες χήρας ἢ ὀρφανοῦ ἢ πένητος ἀλλὰ προνοοῦντες ἀεὶ τοῦ καλοῦ ἐνώπιον θεοῦ καὶ ἀνθρώπων, ἀπεχόμενοι πάσης ὀργῆς,…
δημόσιον πυροῦ ἀρτάβαις ωκ ἐκωλύθην ὑπὸ Σαμβᾶτος τοῦ … … καὶ τῶν σὺν αὐτῷ ἐνώπιον συνόδου εἰς λόγον ἀνδρῶν ν, ἀναλαβόντος … στ … ἀνθρώπους … … τοδ
τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοίτου στρατηγῷ χαίρειν. τοῦ δεδομένου ὑπομνήματος ἀντίγραφον μεταδοθήτω ὡς καθήκει ἐνώπιον. ἔτους ἐνάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραϊανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Τῦβι ιζ. Ἀνδρονίκῳ νεωκόρῳ τοῦ μεγάλου…
Ἡρακλείδης δοθεὶς εἰς κλῆρον ὑπηρετῶν μεταδέδωκα τὸ προγεγραμμένον ἐπιδικασθέντι μοι συνόντος Σαβείνου ἐν τῷ ἐνώπιον ὡς καθήκει. ἔτους ιθ Ἁδριανοῦ Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Μεχὶρ γ.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word θρόνος (transliterated as thronos) means 'throne' or 'seat' and is derived from the verb meaning 'to sit.' It encompasses a range of meanings from a literal chair or seat of authority to metaphorical uses representing power, such as God's sovereignty or kingly rule. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts referring to divine authority, Christ's reign, and even the thrones of angels.
θρόνος, -ου, ὁ
[in LXX chiefly for כִּסֵּא, Ex 11:5, al.;]
in Hom., a seat, chair. Later, a throne, chair of state, seat of authority; of kings: metaph., of God, Mt 5:34, Ac 7:49(LXX), Re 1:4, al.; by meton., for kingly power, sovereignty, Lk 1:32, 52, Ac 2:30; for an angelic hierarchy, Col 1:16; of Christ, Mt 19:28, Re 3:21, al.; of Satan, Re…
Read the full entry →θρόνος, του, ὁ, (OPA to sit; ef. Curtius § 316), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 8D3, a throne, seat, i.e. a chair of state having a footstool ; assigned in the N. T. to kings, hence by meton. for kingly power, royalty: Lk. i. 32,52; Acts ii. 30. metaph. to God, the governor of the world: Mt. ν. 34; xxiii. 22; Acts vii. 49 (Is. Ixvi.1); Rev. i. 4; iii. 21; iv. 2-6, 9, 10, ete.; Heb. iv. 16; viii. 1; xii. 2, to the Messiah, the partner and assistant in the divine administration: Mt. xix. 28; xxv. 31; Rev. iii. 21; xx. 11; xxii. 3; hence the divine power belonging to Christ, Heb. i. 8. to judges, i. q. tribunal or bench (Plut. mor. p- 807 b.): Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. xx. 4. to elders: Rev.iv.4; xi. 16. toSatan: Rev. ii. 13; ef. Bleek ad loc. to the beast (concerning which see θηρίον) : Rev. xvi. 10. θρόνος is used by meton. of one who holds dominion or exercises authority ; thus in…
Read the full entry →θρόνος. For this word, which in the NT, and notably in the Apocalypse, is always an official seat or chair of state, we may compare OG/S 383” (rescript of Commagene — mid. i/B.c.) ἐγὼ πατρώιαν [ἀ]ρχὴν [π]αρ[αλ]α[ β]ὼν βασιλείαν [μ]ὲν ἐμο[ἴ]ς ὑπήκοον θρόνοις, 7d. 4? πρὸς οὐρανίους Διὸς ᾿Ωρομάσδου θρόνους, and Preisigke 9827 (B.C. 4) ὑπὲρ Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος θεοῦ υἱοῦ Σεβαστοῦ . . . τίδ]ν θρόνον καὶ τὸν βωμὸν ἀνέθηκε, 23. ττ645 (B.C. 181-..5) ὑπὲρ βασιλἕως Πτολεμαίο(υ) καὶ βασιλίσσης Κλεοπάτρας . . - τὸ Πτολεμαῖον καὶ τὸν θρόνον Ἕ!ρμεῖ Ἡρακλεῖ. In connexion with the above it may be noticed that Deissmann (1.4.2, | 2 τ = J 2 Ἄ. « ΄ Prete gon (nev) 200) where an inser. on a temple-pillar | Ρ- 280 n.2) from personal observation thinks that ὃ θρόνος is dated—éml Διδύμου ἱερέως θρησκεύοντος. Boisacq (Ρ. 340) τοῦ Σατανᾶ (Rev 213) at Pergamum can only have been the altar of Zeus, which there…
Read the full entry →θρόνος (thronos) — throne.
θρόνος, ὁ,
seat, chair, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
2. throne, chair of state, θ. βασιλήϊος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; king's estate or dignity, σκῆπτρα καὶ θρόνους [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in the Prytaneum, τῷ [Ἀπόλλωνι] θ. ἐξελεῖν [Refs]
3. oracular seat of Apollo, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μαντικοὶ θ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]
4. chair of a teacher, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
5. judge's bench, [Refs 1st c.AD+]
6. Astrology texts,= ὕψωμα, [Refs]
6. b favourable combination of planetary positions, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. a kind of bread, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]
III. name of a lozenge, [Refs 7th c.AD+]
θρόνος
thronos
from thrao (to sit); a stately seat ("throne"); by implication, power
or (concretely) a potentate:--seat, throne.
θρόνος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
a throne, seat
θρόνος θρόνος, ὁ, *θράω a seat, chair, Hom.: a throne, chair of state, Hdt., attic:—in pl. also, the throne, i. e. the king's estate or dignity, Soph.
the oracular seat of Apollo or the Pythia, Aesch., etc.
the chair of a teacher, Lat. cathedra, Plat.
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
thron. (kicce', a "seat" in 2Ki 4:10; a "royal seat" in Jon 3:6; thronos): Usually the symbol of kingly power and dignity. Solomon's throne was noted for its splendor and magnificence (1Ki 10:18-20; compare 2Ch 9:17-19). It symbolizes:
(1) The exalted position of earthly kings, rulers, judges, etc., their majesty and power (of kings: Ge 41:40; 1Ki 2:19; Job 36:7, etc.; denoting governing or judicial power: 2Sa 14:9;
Throne
(Heb. kiss’e), a royal chair or seat of dignity (Deut. 17:18; 2 Sam. 7:13; Ps. 45:6); an elevated seat with a canopy and hangings, which cover it. It denotes the seat of the high priest in 1 Sam. 1:9; 4:13, and of a provincial governor in Neh. 3:7 and Ps. 122:5. The throne of Solomon is described at length in 1 Kings 10:18-20.
The Hebrew word so translated applies to any elevated seat occupied by a person in authority, whether a high priest, (1 Samuel 1:9) a judge, (Psalms 122:5) or a military chief (Jeremiah 1:16) The use of a chair in a country where the usual postures were squatting and reclining was at all times regarded as a symbol of dignity. (2 Kings 4:10; Proverbs 9:14) In order to specify a throne in our sense of the term, it was necessary to add to the word the notion of royalty; hence the frequent occurrence of such expressions as "throne of the kingdom." (17:18; 1 Kings 1:46;
An established emblem of kingly dignity and power, used by sovereigns on all stale occasions. That of Solomon was of ivory, overlaid with gold; having six broad steps, every one guarded by a golden lion at each end, 1Ki 10:18-20. Heaven is called God’s throne, and the earth his footstool, Isa 66:1. His throne is also sublimely described as everlasting, and as built upon justice and equity, Ps 45:6; 97:2. See also Isa 6:2-4; Eze 1:1- 28. Christ is on the throne forever, as the King of heaven, Ps 110:1; He 1:8;
64 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 62 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 59 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
πάλιν γε μὴν Αἴγυπτον ἀφηνιάσασαν, ἡνίκα τὸν ἀντίθεον ἀπεσέμνυνε νοῦν τὰ παράσημα τῆς βασιλείας ἀναδοῦσα αὐτῷ, τὸν θρόνον, τὸ σκῆπτρον, τὸ διάδημα, δέκα πληγαῖς καὶ τιμωρίαις ὁ τῶν ὅλων ἐπίτροπος καὶ κηδεμὼν νουθετεῖ.
τῷ δὲ ἐπιθέματι αὐτῆς ἦσαν πρόστυποι δύο, Χερουβεῖς μὲν αὐτοὺς Ἑβραῖοι καλοῦσι, ζῷα δέ ἐστι πετεινὰ μορφὴν δʼ οὐδενὶ τῶν ὑπʼ ἀνθρώπων ἑωραμένων παραπλήσια, Μωυσῆς δέ φησι τῷ θρόνῳ τοῦ θεοῦ προστυπεῖς ἑωρακέναι.
λέγει κύριος: Ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου: ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου;
1 λόγος δραχμῶν υ. ἱερεῦσι δραχμαὶ ξ, Νείλῳ δραχμαὶ κ, θρόνῳ δραχμαὶ κ, ἱπποκόμοις δραχμαὶ … , κήρυκι … ξυστάρχῃ … Ὡρείωνι … Σεουήρῳ
αὐτοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν κατεστάθην ἐγὼ κατὰ πρόσταγμα τοῦ κυρίου μου Ἰσιδώρου τοῦ διακοσμήσαντος τὸν θρόνον τῆς ἡγεμονίας τῆς αὐτῆς Ἀλεξανδρίας ἐπίτροπος τῇ παιδὶ ἀκολούθως τοῖς περὶ τούτου γενομένοις ὑπομνήμασι
καὶ ειτα … ν κοῦφον καὶ … δρον καὶ τοῦ κύκλου δερματίνου αὐτοῦ, καὶ θρόνος εἷς , καὶ φρινειν καὶ γλωσσοκομεῖον ἓν ξύλινα, καὶ ἑπτὰ κειπλαρια· ὧν ἓν καὶ
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ἐνώπιον (i.e., *enopion*) means 'before' or 'in the presence of.' It is derived from a combination of prepositions and a term meaning 'face.' This word is often used in the New Testament, particularly in the writings of Luke and Revelation, to indicate being in the sight of someone, especially God, as seen in verses like Romans 14:22 and Revelation 1:4.
† ἐνώπιος, -ον
(< ὤψ),
[in LXX for פָּנִים, etc. ;]
face to face, in sight (Theocr.; ἄρτοι ἐ., Ex 25:29): neut., ἐνώπιον, in vernacular, with force of prep. c. gen. [in LXX for לְעֵינֵי, לִפְנֵי, etc., cf. Dalman, Words, 31 f., 209 f., and Deiss., BS., 213], in NT, most freq. in Lk, Ac, Re, never in Mt, Mk, before, in the presence of: Lk 1:19 4:7, Ac 4:10 6:5, Re 1:4 2:14, al.; esp. ἐ. Κυρίου (θεοῦ), in the sight of God, or with God as witness or as judge, Ro 14:22, I Co 1:29, I Ti 2:3, Ja 4:10, I Pe…
ἐνώπιον, neut. of the adj. ἐνώπιος, -ov, (i. 4. ὁ ἐν ὠπὶ ὦν, one who is in sight, Theocr. 22, 152; Sept. Ex. xxxiii. 11; ἄρτοι ἐνώπιοι, Ex. xxv. 29); used adverbially it gets the force of a preposition [W. § 54,6; B. 319 (274)], and is joined with the gen. (hardly to be found so in any prof. auth.), before, in sight of any one ; time and again in Sept. for .)}3 and +99, also for 33) and 33375 among N. T. writ. used most freq. by Luke and the auth. of the Rev., but never by Matthew and Mark. It is used 1. of occupied place: in that place which is before, or over against, opposite, any one and towards which another turns his eyes; @. prop.: εἶναι ἐνώπ. τινος, Rev. i. 4; vii. 15; [xiv. 5 Rec.]; so that εἶναι must be mentally supplied before ἐνώπιον, Rev. iv. 5 sq.; viii. 3; ix.13; after στῆναι, Acts x. 30; ἑστηκέναι, Rev. vil. 9; viii. 2; xi. 4; xii. 4; xx. 12; παρεστηκέναι, Lk. i. 19…
Read the full entry →ἐνώπιον. To Deissmann's proof (BS p. 213) that this word belongs to the vernacular, and is not to be treated as a new formation of ‘* biblical” Greek, much additional evidence can now be added from iii/B.c. onwards. The earliest ex. of the word known to us, P Hib J. 3055 (before B.c. 271), is unfortunately followed by a lacuna—y δίκη σου ἀναγραφήσετ[α]ι ἐν [τῶι ἐν Ἡρ]ακλέους πόλει δικαστηρίωι [ἐ]νῴπιον [. .. ., **the case will be drawn up against you in the court at Heracleopolis in the presence of . . .” (Edd.). Wilcken’s translation of BGU II. 5781 (a.p. 189) μετάδ(ος) ἐνώπι(ον), “deliver personally” (cited by Deissmann z¢ szfra) finds an exact parallel in P Tebt I. 141% (B.c. 114) παρηγγελκότες ἐνώπι[ον, “1 gave notice in person "᾿ (Edd,), P Flor I. 567° (A.D. 234) μετέδωκ(α) Avpnd((w) . . ἐνώπιον ὡς καθήκει. For the prepositional use with the gen. see P Lond 35° (B.c. 161) (=I. p.…
Read the full entry →ἐνώπιον (enōpion) — before.
ἐνώπ-ιος, ον,
(ὤψ) facing, to the front, πρό τ᾽ ἐνώπια [Refs 7th c.BC+]face to face, [LXX]; ἄρτοι ἐ. shewbread, [Refs]; διαστολῶν γεγονυιῶν ὑμῖν καὶ ἐνοπίοις (sic) καὶ διὰ γραμμάτων in person, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
II. neuter ἐνώπιον as adverb, face to face, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; in person, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]: as preposition with genitive, [NT+4th c.BC+]. Regul. adverb -ίως[Refs]
ἐνώπιον
enopion
neuter of a compound of 1722 and a derivative of 3700; in the face of
(literally or figuratively):--before, in the presence (sight) of, to.
see GREEK for 1722
see GREEK for 3700
ἐνώπιον
Adv
before the face of, in the presence of
ἐνώπιον enōpion 94x
gen., before, in the presence of, Lk. 5:25; 8:47; in front of, Rev. 4:5, 6; immediately preceding as a forerunner, Lk. 1:17; Rev. 16:19; from the Hebrew, in the presence of, metaphysically, i.e. in the sphere of sensation or thought, Lk. 12:9; 15:10; Acts 10:31; in the eyes of, in the judgment of, Lk. 16:15; 24:11; Acts 4:19
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
be-for': The translation of a great variety of Hebrew and Greek words. "Haran died before (the English Revised Version "in the presence of," literally "before the face of") his father Terah" (Ge 11:28). To be "before" God is to enjoy His favor (Ps 31:22). "The Syrians before" (Isa 9:12 the Revised Version, margin "on the east," as "behind," owing to the position of Canaan, relative to Syria, implies the west).
95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 94 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 148 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι ὁ Ἀβραὰμ „ἔτι ἦν ἑστηκὼς ἐνώπιον κυρίου καὶ ἐγγίσας εἶπε Μὴ συναπολέσῃς δίκαιον μετὰ ἀσεβοῦς“ (Gen.
καὶ ἴδωμεν, τί καλὸν καὶ τί τερπνὸν καὶ τί προσδεκτὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ ποιήσαντος ἡμᾶς.
Καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι δὲ εὔσπλαγχνοι, εἰς πάντας ἐλεήμονες, ἐπιστρέφοντες τὰ ἀποπεπλανημένα, ἐπισκεπτόμενοι πάντας ἀσθενεῖς, μὴ ἀμελοῦντες χήρας ἢ ὀρφανοῦ ἢ πένητος ἀλλὰ προνοοῦντες ἀεὶ τοῦ καλοῦ ἐνώπιον θεοῦ καὶ ἀνθρώπων, ἀπεχόμενοι πάσης ὀργῆς,…
δημόσιον πυροῦ ἀρτάβαις ωκ ἐκωλύθην ὑπὸ Σαμβᾶτος τοῦ … … καὶ τῶν σὺν αὐτῷ ἐνώπιον συνόδου εἰς λόγον ἀνδρῶν ν, ἀναλαβόντος … στ … ἀνθρώπους … … τοδ
τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοίτου στρατηγῷ χαίρειν. τοῦ δεδομένου ὑπομνήματος ἀντίγραφον μεταδοθήτω ὡς καθήκει ἐνώπιον. ἔτους ἐνάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραϊανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Τῦβι ιζ. Ἀνδρονίκῳ νεωκόρῳ τοῦ μεγάλου…
Ἡρακλείδης δοθεὶς εἰς κλῆρον ὑπηρετῶν μεταδέδωκα τὸ προγεγραμμένον ἐπιδικασθέντι μοι συνόντος Σαβείνου ἐν τῷ ἐνώπιον ὡς καθήκει. ἔτους ιθ Ἁδριανοῦ Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Μεχὶρ γ.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSN — Article · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-GSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ἀρνίον (lemma: arnion) means 'a little lamb' or simply 'lamb.' It is a diminutive form derived from ἀρήν and is used in various contexts, including the New Testament, where it often refers to Christ as the sacrificial lamb. The term appears frequently in Revelation, highlighting its significance in early Christian texts.
ἀρνίον, -ου, τό
(dimin. of ἀρήν; v. MM, s.v.),
[in LXX: Ps 113 (114):4, 6 (pl., עאֹן בְּנֵן), Je 11:19 (כֶּבֶשׁ), 27 (50):45 (צָעִיר)*;]
a little lamb, a lamb: Jo 21:15, Re27.†
ἀρνίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. ἀρήν, 4. v.), [fr. Lys. down], a little lamb, a lamb: Rev. xiii. 11; Jesus calls his followers τὰ ἀρνία pov in Jn. xxi. 15; τὸ ἀρνίον is used of Christ, innocently suffering and dying to expiate the sins of men, very often in Rey., as v. 6, 8,12, etc. (Jer. xi. 19; xxvii. (1.) 45 ; Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 4, 6; Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 10.)
ἀρνίον. P Theéad 814 (A.D. 306) ἀρνία ἐνιαύσια,15 ἀρνία καὶ ἐρύφια. BGU II. 3775 7 (early vii)A.p.), with other animal names, many in the -tov form—kKapyAt(a), ὀρνίθ(ια), perh. χοίρ(ια), ete. P Strass I. 247% (A.p, 118) ἀρνίων ἐπιγονῆ(ς) . - ἀριθμῶι ἀρνίω(ν). P Gen I. 687 (Α.Ὁ. 382) ἀρνία ἕνδεκα. Its choice by the author of the Apocalypse as an exclusive term, for very frequent use, is part of a general tendency of the vernacular, in which nouns in -ίον multiplied fast: it is interesting to note that he has followed that tendency much earlier than our papyrus writers did in the case of this word. The complete absence of diminutive force in ἀρνίον as against ἀρήν may be noted. (MGr ἀρνί.)
ἀρνίον (arnion) — lamb.
ἀρνίον, τό,
diminutive of ἀρήν, a little lamb, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. sheepskin, fleece, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
ἀρνίον
arnion
diminutive from 704; a lambkin:--lamb.
see GREEK for 704
ἀρνίον, ου, τό
n.n.
a lamb
ἀρνίον ἀρνός a sheep-skin, Luc.
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
Lamb
(1.) Heb. kebes, a male lamb from the first to the third year. Offered daily at the morning and the evening sacrifice (Ex. 29:38-42), on the Sabbath day (Num. 28:9), at the feast of the New Moon (28:11), of Trumpets (29:2), of Tabernacles (13-40), of Pentecost (Lev. 23:18-20), and of the Passover (Ex. 12:5), and on many other occasions (1 Chr. 29:21; 2 Chr. 29:21; Lev. 9:3; 14:10-25).
The young of the sheep, and also the kid of the goat, Ex 12:5, Christ is the Lamb of God, Joh 1:29, as being the accepted sacrifice for human sin. The sacrifices of the Old Testament were an ordained and perpetual foreshadowing not only of his spotless holiness and his unresisting meekness, Isa 53:4-9. He is described in Re 5:6 12:11, as wearing the form of a sacrificial lamb in heaven itself. See PASSOVER and SACRIFICES.
→ Offering of Ex 29:38-41; Le 3:7; 4:32; 5:6; 22:23; 23:12; Nu 6:12; 7:15,21; 28:3-8
→ Not to be seethed (boiled) in its own mother's milk Ex 23:19
31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 30 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
ἀποκριναμένων δὲ ἡμῶν, ὅτι „νόμιμα παρ’ ἑτέροις ἕτερα καὶ χρῆσις ἐνίων ὡς ἡμῖν καὶ τοῖς ἀντιδίκοις ἀπείρηται“, καὶ φαμένου τινὸς „ὡς πολλοί γε καὶ τὰ προχειρότατα ἀρνία οὐ προσφέρονται“, γελάσας „εὖ γε“ εἶπεν, „ἔστι γὰρ οὐχ ἡδέα.“
μόσχον τε καὶ κριὸν σὺν ἀρνίῳ ἐτείῳ ὁλομελῆ καυθησόμενα καὶ σὺν αὐτοῖς χίμαρον ἐπὶ παραιτήσει ἁμαρτημάτων.
λέγει γὰρ ὁ κύριος Ἔσεσθε ὡς ἀρνία ἐν μέσῳ λύκων.
εἰς τὸ ἐνεστὸς ιδ ἔτος Ἀντωνίνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου καὶ τοὺς ἐπακολουθοῦντας ἀπὸ γονῆς ἀρνίον α, ὃ νεμήσεται περὶ τὴν αὐτὴν κώμην καὶ διὰ ὅλου τοῦ νομοῦ διὰ νομέως
Στατιανοῦ τοῦ λαμπροτάτου ἡγεμόνος τὰ νῦν κτηθέντα μοι εἰς τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν πρόβατα λη ἀρνία ιβ αἶγας β, ἃ καὶ νεμήσεται περὶ κώμην Παλῶσιν καὶ διʼ ὅλου τοῦ νομοῦ
μέρει τῶν κατʼ ἔτος ἐκβησομένων ἐξ αὐτῶν λημμάτων, διδόντος ἐμοῦ ὑπὲρ ἐπιγονῆς κατʼ ἔτος ἀρνία ἐνιαύσια εὐάρεστα θηλυκά τε καὶ ἀρρενικὰ εἴκοσι ἓξ ἔμποκα ἐπὶ λήμμασιν τοῖς προκειμένοις· δώσω
περιβάλλω means to throw around or over, often used in the context of clothing or wrapping oneself. It can also refer to surrounding or enclosing something, as seen in various New Testament passages like Matthew 25:36 and Luke 23:11. The word is built from the prefix περί (around) and βάλλω (to throw). There is a notable usage in Revelation, where it describes being wrapped or clothed in various contexts.
περι-βάλλω,
[in LXX chiefly for כּסה pi., also for לבשׁ, עטה, etc.;]
to throw around or over, put on or over;
of siege or defensive works: χάρακά σοι, Lk 19:43 (WH, mg.; παρεμβ-, WH, txt.);
of clothing, to put on, wrap about, clothe with: c. acc. rei, Lk 23:11; c. acc. pers., Mt 25:36, 38, 43; c. dupl. acc. (not cl.; Bl., § 34, 4), Jo 19:2; pf. pass., to have wrapped round one: c. acc. rei (cl.), Mk 14:51 16:5, Re 7:9, 13 10:1 11:3 12:1 17:4 18:16 19:13; c. dat. rei, Re 4:4 (WH, txt.; seq. ἐν, WH, mg.); fut., seq. ἐν (cf.
περι-βάλλω : fut. περιβαλῶ ; 2 aor. περιέβαλον ; pf. pass. ptep. περιβεβλημένος ; 2 aor. mid. περιεβαλόμην ; 2 fut. mid. περιβαλοῦμαι ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for D3 to cover, cover up; also for way to clothe, and πιὸ» to veil; to throw around, to put round; a. UNG
περιβάλλω. For a good parallel to the TR of Lk 19% cr. P Oxy IV. 70782 (¢. A.D. 136) where a man is charged with neglecting a vineyarl—pySt τὰς πλάτας περιβεβληκέναι, “not even to have built the enclosing walls.” For the meaning ‘‘ wrap about,” ‘* clothe myself,’’ as in Mk 1451 (cf. Field Mores, p. 40), see P Fay 1218 (c, n.c. 103) ἐξέδυσαν ὃ περ[ιεἸβεβλήμην ἱμάτιον, ‘they stripped me of the garment in which I was clothed,” P Grenf I. 384 (ii/iB.c.) (asemended Berichtigungen, Ῥ. 182) ὅ τε περιεβλήμην ὀθόνιον κατέρηξεν, aud the
περιβάλλω (periballō) — to clothe.
περιβάλλω,
future -βᾰλῶ: aorist περιέβᾰλον (see. below):— throw round, about, or over, put on or over, with accusative of things, φίλας περὶ χεῖρε βαλόντε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. τινὶ δεσμά, βρόχους, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τινὰ χαλκεύματι put him round the sword, i. e. stab him, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; also περὶ τὰ στέρνα θώρηκας π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; περὶ ἕρμα π. ναῦν wreck it on.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, throw round or over oneself, put on, with accusative of things, περιβαλλόμενοι τεύχεα putting on their arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἷμα, φᾶρος περιβάλλεσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently of defences, τεῖχος καὶ σωτηρίην περιβαλέσθαι τοῖς τε χρήμασι καὶ τοῖς σώμασιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λιμένι τεῖχος, χάρακα τῇ παρεμβολῇ, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; also περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον τεῖχος π. [Refs 5th c.BC+] build a wall round it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in perfect…
Read the full entry →περιβάλλω
periballo
from 4012 and 906; to throw all around, i.e. invest (with a palisade
or with clothing):--array, cast about, clothe(-d me), put on.
see GREEK for 4012
see GREEK for 906
περιβάλλω
v.
I cast around, clothe
περιβάλλω fut. -βα^λῶ aor2 -έβα^λον to throw round, περὶ χαῖρε βαλών having thrown his arms round him, Od.; χέρας π. τινί Eur.; περὶ δ᾽ ὠλένας δέρᾳ βάλοιμι id. Eur.; π. τινὶ δεσμά Aesch.; π. ναῦν περὶ ἕρμα to wreck it on a reef, Thuc.:—Mid. to throw round oneself, put on, c. acc. rei, τεύχεα περιβαλλόμενοι putting on their arms, Od.; π. ἔρυμα, ἕρκος, τείχεα to throw round oneself for defence, Hdt.; c. dupl. acc., τεῖχος περιβάλλεσθαι πόλιν to build a wall round it, id. Hdt.:—in perf. pass. to have a thing put round one, Plat.; περιβεβλημένος τὸ τεῖχος having his wall around him, id. Plat.
Read the full entry →Verb-RPP-APM — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · plural · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
V-RPP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
23 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 23 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 39 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἤδη τινὰ τῶν παλαιῶν φασι καθάπερ ἐκπρεπεστάτης γυναικὸς τῷ σοφίας ἐπιμανέντα κάλλει πολυτελεστάτης πομπῆς θεασάμενον παρασκευὴν ἄφθονον, ἀπιδόντα πρός τινας τῶν συνήθων εἰπεῖν „ἴδετε, ὦ ἑταῖροι, ὅσων χρείαν οὐκ ἔχω“, καίτοι γε ἔξω τῶν ἀναγκαίων…
ἐπεὶ δʼ εὐτρεπὲς ἦν τὸ δεῖπνον, ἐρίφου δέρματι τὸν βραχίονα περιβαλών, ἵνα πιστεύοιτο παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ διὰ τὴν δασύτητα Ἡσαῦς εἶναι, τὰ γὰρ ἄλλα πάντʼ ὢν ὅμοιος διὰ τὸ εἶναι δίδυμος τούτῳ μόνῳ διέφερε, καὶ φοβηθεὶς μὴ πρὶν γενέσθαι τὰς εὐχὰς εὑρεθεὶς…
μέρος τοῦ σώματος καὶ διέκοψάν μου τὴν κεφαλὴν ῥάβδοις κραναίναις καὶ ἐξέδυσαν μηλωτὴν ἣν περιβεβλημένος ἱμάτιον ἔσχον ἀξίαν δραχμῶν ρε ὥς με διαφυγεῖν καὶ κινδυνεύειν με τῷ βίωι· ἐπιδίδωμι
Ἱερημίου τινος τῆς κώμης βοηθοῦ· ἀκουόμενος … του … θαλμου καὶ … σιν θανασίμοις περιβαλὼν ὁ εἰρημένος τιμωρητὴς Σενούθης ἀνείλετο αὐτόν· ἐκ δευτέρου δὲ κατὰ μηχανοπανουργίας τρόπον … σε
μελετῆσαί τινα κατὰ σοῦ ὡς μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν τελευτὴν ἐνάγειν σοι ὁμολογῶ ὁμνύων τὸ περιβεβλημένον μοι σχῆμα ὅτι οὐδὲν μοι χρεωστεῖς οὔτε δέδωμεν σοι τί ποτε ἢ πεπράσκειν σοί
The Greek word στολή (stolē) refers to a type of clothing, specifically a long garment or robe, often associated with dignity and worn by priests and persons of rank. It can also denote equipment or armament in a broader sense. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts related to clothing, such as in Mark and Luke, where it describes the attire of significant figures.
στολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (στέλλω [q- V-] to prepare, equip, 2 pf. €aToAa) 1. an equipment (Aeschyl.). 2. an equipment in clothes, clothing; spec. a loose outer garment for men which extended to the feet (cf. Eng. stole (Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v.)], worn by kings (Jon. iii. 6), priests, and persons of rank: Mk. xii. 38; xvi.5; Lk. xv. 22; xx. 46; Rev. vi. 11; vii. 9,13, [14*, 14
στολή, ascribed to Bardaisan, which show that in Mesopotamia in li/ili A.D. στοιχεῖα were understood as ** personal cosmic powers.”’ Tor an extension to the thought of ““tutelary spirits,’’ “angels,” see Deissmann in £8 s.v. ‘‘ Elements,” who applies it in the difficult NT passages Gal 43,9 and Col 28, 39, understanding by Gal 4% ‘‘cosmic spiritual beings,” the “angels” by whom according to 319 the law was ordained, and by 45 ‘‘the heathen deities’? whom the Galatians had formerly served, while in Co! 28, 30 it is again personal powers who are thought of, ‘‘ the principalities and the powers ” of 215. It may be added that this interpretation can also be illustrated from modern Greek usage, as when in Abbott Songs p. 178° we read of τὸ στοιχεῖο᾽ τοῦ ποταμοῦ, ‘ the spirit of the stream.’’ Cf. Thumb Handbook p. 356: στοιχειό, “spirit,” ‘‘ghost,” and στοιχειώνω, “make a ghost of,” ‘‘ become…
Read the full entry →στολή (stolē) — robe.
στολ-ή, ἡ,
Aeolic dialect σπολά (which see): (στέλλω):— equipment, fitting out, στρατοῦ [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. armament, [Refs]
II. equipment in clothes, raiment, [Refs]; σχῆμα Ἑλλάδος σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: metaphorically of birds, σ. πτερῶν [Refs 3rd c.AD+]
II.2. garment, robe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σ. θηρός, of the lion's skin which Heracles wore, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν σ. περιπατεῖν in full dress, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] (variant{-λίῳ} cited in [Refs]
II.3. act of dressing, μετὰ τὴν σ. [Refs 4th c.AD+]
III. (στέλλω IV) check to motion, pressure, τοῦ ἀέρος [Refs 4th c.BC+]
III.2. reduction, diminution, τῶν σιτίων [Refs 1st c.AD+]
στολή
stole
from 4724; equipment, i.e. (specially), a "stole" or long-fitting gown
(as a mark of dignity):--long clothing (garment), (long) robe.
see GREEK for 4724
στολή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
a long robe
στολή στολή, ἡ, στέλλω an equipment, armament, Aesch.
equipment, raiment, apparel, Hdt., Trag.
a piece of dress, a garment, robe, Soph., Eur., etc.; στ. θηρός, of the lion's skin which Hercules wore, Eur.
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
See GARMENTS.
10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 53 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
25, 10), οὐδὲ στολὰς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ διττὰς ἀναδίδωσιν (Exod.
ὡς δὲ τὸ τοῦ Βενιαμὶν φορτίον ἐρευνῶντες λαμβάνουσι τὸν σκύφον εἰς οἰμωγὰς καὶ θρήνους εὐθὺς ἐτράπησαν καὶ τὰς στολὰς ἐπικαταρρήξαντες ἔκλαιόν τε τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἐπὶ τῇ μελλούσῃ κολάσει τῆς κλοπῆς αὐτούς τε διαψευσομένους τὸν πατέρα περὶ τῆς Βενιαμὶν…
τῆς μητρὸς ὧν Ἑλένη· ψέλια ἀργυρᾶ τεσσάρων στατήρων καὶ ἐποίδιον χρυσοῦν τετάρτων τριῶν καὶ στολὴ Συριακὴ λευκὴ δραχμῶν ρκ· καὶ Θατρῆς· ψέλια ἀργυρᾶ τεσσάρων στατήρων καὶ ἐποίδιον χρυσοῦν τετάρτων
παρὰ τοῦ ἀγροίκου ἀπὸ τοῦ γυμνασίου εἴρηκα τῶι αὐτῶι ὅτι ἔγραψας τὰ περὶ τὴν στολὴν … ὅτε ἄγνοιαν νῦν ἀνταναπληρῶ διότι οὐκ ἔλαβον ἀργύριον παρὰ τῶν ἐριοπολῶν ἀφʼ οὗ
ἀσήμου δραχμῶν τεσσαράκοντα τεσσάρων καὶ κλάνια δύο ὁλκῆς ἀσήμου δραχμῶν δέκα ἓξ καὶ ἱματίων στολὰς δύο , λευκὴν μίαν ναρκισσίνην μίαν , καὶ πάλλια πέντα καὶ χαλκώματα καὶ
The Greek word λευκός (i.e., *leukos*) means 'white' or 'bright,' derived from the root for 'light.' It covers a range of meanings from the literal color of objects like clothing and grain to metaphorical uses indicating clarity or purity. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts describing the dazzling garments of angels and the purity of souls.
λευκός, τή, -όν, (λεύσσω to see, behold, look at; akin ta Lat. luceo, Germ. leuchten; cf. Curtius p. 113 and § 87; [Vanizek p. 8177), Sept. for 139; 1. light, bright, brilliant: τὰ ἱμάτια . . . λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς, Mt. xvii. 2; esp. bright or brilliant from whiteness, (dazzling) white: spoken of the garments of angels, and of those exalted to the splendor of the heavenly state, Mk. xvi.5; Lk. ix. 29; Actsi.10; Rev. iii.5; iv.4; vi. 11; vii. 9,13; xix. 14, (shining or white garments were worn on festive and state occasions, Eccles. ix. 8; οἵ. Heindorf on Hor. sat. 2, 2,61); with ὡσεὶ or ὡς ὁ χιών added: Mk. ix. 3 RL; Mt. xxviii. 3, (ἵπποι λευκότεροι χιόνος, Hom. Il. 10, 437); ἐν λευκοῖς sc. ἱματίοις (added in Rev. iii. 5; iv. 4), Jn. xx.12; Rev. iii. 4; ef. W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)]; used of white garmentsas the sign of innocence and purity of soul, Rev. iii. 18; of the heavenly throne…
Read the full entry →λευκός. In a list of soldiers, P Amh II. 625 (11.8.6.} three persons called Apollonius are distinguished as μέλας, ‘‘the dark,’’ λευκός, ‘‘ the fair,” and oKevod(dpos), “‘ the baggagecarrier,” respectively. For the more general meaning of λευκός, ‘‘white,’’ cf. such passages as P Ryl II. 146'° (A.D. 39) ἐρίων σταθμία δέκα λευκῶν, ‘* 10 measures of white wool,” P Giss I. 21° (time of Trajan) τὸ συνθεσείδιον τὸ λευκόν, ‘the white dress”—a loose wrap often worn at meals, P Oxy III. 53178 (ii/A.D.) τὰ ἱμάτια τὰ λευκά, and P Hamb I. 38% (a.p. 182) λευκὸν ἐν ὀφθαλμῷ ἀριστερῴ. In P Oxy III. 471™* (ii/a.D.) the charge is brought against | ἁγνὸν ἐν] ἐσθῆτι λευκ[ῆι.
λευκός (leukos) — white.
λευκός, ή, όν,
light, bright, clear (opposed to μέλας in all senses), αἴγλη [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λευκὸν (variant{λαμπρόν}).. ἠέλιος ὥς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of metallic surfaces, λέβης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λ. γαλήνη a glassy calm, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of water, clear, limpid, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
2. metaphorically, clear, distinct, of the voice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: in literary sense, clear, λ. στίχος [Refs 1st c.AD+], when a rogue was detected, [Refs] adverb -κῶς, πάντα φαίνειν, of Hermes, [Refs 1st c.AD+]: comparative -ότερον, διαλεχθῆναι [Refs 3rd c.AD+]
II. of colour, white, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+], varying from the pure white of snow ([ἵπποι] -ότεροι χιόνος [Refs 8th c.BC+] to the grey of dust (λευκοὶ ἐγένοντο κονισάλῳ [Refs]; λ. ἅρμα, ={λεύκιππον}, [Refs…
λευκός
leukos
from luke ("light"); white:--white.
λευκός, ή, όν
Adj
white, bright
λευκός λευκός, ή, όν from Root ΛΥΚ light, bright, brilliant, of sun light, Hom., Soph.; and of metallic surfaces, λέβης Il.; also, λ. γαλήνη a glassy calm, Od.; of water, generally, bright, limpid, Hom., Eur.
metaph. clear, plain, distinct, of authors, Anth.
of colour, white, Hom., etc.; λ. ἅρμα ῀ λεύκιππον, Eur.
of the skin, white, fair, Hom., Trag.; with a notion of bare, πούς Eur., cf. λευκόπους:—later, as a mark of effeminacy, blanched, white, pale, Ar., Xen.:— λευκαὶ φρένες in Pind. may be pale with envy, envious.
λ. χρυσός, pale gold, i. e. gold alloyed with silver (prob. the same as ἤλεκτρον), opp. to χρυσὸς ἄπεφθος, Hdt.
λευκὸν ἦμαρ νυκτὸς ἐκ μελαγχίμου a bright day after a night of mourning, Aesch.
Adj-APF — Adjective · accusative · plural · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
A-APF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
hwit.
See COLORS.
White
A symbol of purity (2 Chr. 5:12; Ps. 51:7; Isa. 1:18; Rev. 3:18; 7:14). Our Lord, at his transfiguration, appeared in raiment “white as the light” (Matt. 17:2, etc.).
→ See COLOR
25 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 25 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 26 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
πῶς ἡμῶν ὁ νοῦς καταλαμβάνει, ὅτι τουτὶ λευκὸν ἢ μέλαν ἐστίν, εἰ μὴ βοηθῷ χρησάμενος ὁράσει;
ὁρῶν γὰρ αὐτῷ τὸν θεὸν πρὸς ὅτι θελήσειε συλλαμβανόμενον ὑπισχνεῖτο τῶν τεχθησομένων αὐτῷ παρέξειν ἔσθʼ ὅτε μὲν ὅτι καὶ γένοιτο λευκόν, ποτὲ δʼ αὖ τὰ μέλανα τῶν γεννωμένων.
ταῦτά μου συμβουλευομένου καὶ διακρίνοντος ἐν τῇ κάρδίᾳ μου, βλέπω κατέναντί μου καθέδραν λευκὴν ἐξ ἐρίων χιονίνων γεγονυῖαν μεγάλην: καὶ ἦλθεν γυνὴ πρεσβῦτις ἐν ἱματισμῷ λαμπροτάτῳ, ἔχουσα βιβλίον εἰς τὰς χεῖρας, καὶ ἐκάθισεν μόνη καὶ ἀσπάζεταί με:…
ἀριστερῶι ὑπτίωι, τῆι ἑαυτῆς Φιλοξένας ἀδελφῆι Εὐδαιμονίδι ὡς ἐτῶν κβ μέσηι μελίχρωι μακροπροσώπωι εὐθύρινι λευκὸν ὀφθαλμοῦ δεξιοῦ … μετὰ κυρίου … ὡς ἐτῶν … οὐλὴ μετώπωι ἐκ δεξιῶν, παρακεχωρηκέναι
Ἀρτεμίδωρος νεώτερος Ἀρτεμιδώρου Χαιρήμονι Σαταβοῦτος χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ πεπρακέναι σοι ὄνον θήλειαν λευκὴν ταύτην τοιαύτην ἀναπόρριφον καὶ ἀπέχω τὴν συνπεφωνημένην τιμὴν πᾶσαν ἐκ πλήρους ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ἑξήκοντα,
Πανεφρέμμει Ἀπύγχεως ὡς ἐτῶν λ οὐλὴ μετώπῳ ἐκ δεξιῶν, πεπρακέναι αὐτῷ ὄνον θήλειαν τελείαν λευκὴν μυόχρουν ἀναπόριφον. ἀπέχει τιμὴν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ἑκατὸν ἓξ · καὶ βεβαιοῖ ὑπογραφεὺς τοῦ ἠγορακότος
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
φοῖνιξ (i.e., *phoinix*) primarily means 'palm tree' or 'palm branch,' as seen in John 12:13 and Revelation 7:9. The word can also refer to the fruit of the palm, specifically dates. Additionally, it has associations with the color purple or crimson, linked to the Phoenicians. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.
φοῖνιξ (on the accent, v. Bl., § 4, 2; WM, § 6, lc), -ικος, ὁ,
[in LXX for תָּמָר,תֹּמֶר,תִּמֹּרָה;]
the date-palm, palm: τὰ βαΐα τῶν φ., Jo 12:13; of palm branches, φοίνικες (as Arist., II Mac 10:7, al.), Re 7:9.†
Φοίνιξ (or, as some prefer to write it, φοῖνιξ ; cf. W. 8 6, 1c.; [and reff. s. v. κήρυξ), -ικος, 6; I. as an appellative, a palm-tree (fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 7120) : τὰ Baia τῶν dow. (see Baiov), the branches of the palmtrees, Jn. xii. 13; but φοίνικες itself [A. V. palms] is put for the branches in Rev. vii. 9 (2 Mace. x. 7; xiv. 4; [so Aristot. magn. mor. § 34 p. 1196", 867). Il. a prop. name, Pheniz, a city and haven of Crete [B. Ὁ. (esp. Am. ed.) 8. v. Phenice]: Acts xxvii. 12.
φοῖνιξ, “a palm tree” (Jn 121%), or the fruit of a palm tree “dates”: cf. P Hal I. 7° (B.c. 232) αἴτησον 8... ὥστε eis [ξέϊνια φοίνικας, P Amh II. 318 (B.c. 112) τόπους περιειλημμένους els φυτείαν φοινίκων, ‘‘ pieces of land which had been enclosed for the purpose of growing palms” (Edd.), and so 15, BGU IV. 1095% (A.D. 57) περὶ δὲ τοῦ φοίνικος παλαιὸν οὐχ εὕραμεν, ‘as regards the dates, we did not find any old,” P Ryl II. 172!" (a.D. 208) φοίνικος μονοξύλου, ‘‘dates on single stems” (Edd.), and P Flor I. 50? (division of property—A.b. 268) σὺν τοῖς ἐ[νοῦσι φοί]νιξι kal φυτοῖς. Related words are φοινικών, “ἃ palm garden”’ (P Tebt II. 343°—ii/A.D.), φοινίκινος, ‘‘made of…
Read the full entry →φοῖνιξ (phoinix) — palm.
φοῖνιξ, ῑκος, ὁ, ἡ,
Phoenician, Φοῖνιξ ἀνὴρ ἀπατήλια εἰδώς [Refs 8th c.BC+]
2. feminine, γυνή Φοίνισσα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Φοίνισσαι, name of plays by Euripides, Phrynichus, etc.; also Φ. ἐμπολά [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χθών, νᾶσος, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κώπη [Refs 3rd c.BC+]
II. Carthaginian, ἀλαλατός [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__B φοῖνιξ, ῑκος, ὁ, purple or crimson, because the discovery and earliest use of this colour was ascribed to the Phoenicians, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —hence,
__B.2 as adjective (feminine φοίνισσα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φοῖνιξ as feminine, [Refs 5th c.BC+], blood-bay, of a horse, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of red cattle, φοίνισσα ἀγέλα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: of the colour of fire, φοίνισσα φλόξ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πυρὸς φ. πνοά E.[same place]; also φ. ἱμάντες…
φοῖνιξ
phoinix
of uncertain derivation; a palm-tree:--palm (tree).
φοίνιξ, ικός, ὁ
n.m.
a palm tree, palm branch
φοῖνιξ φοῖνιξ, ι_κος, appellat. a purple-red, purple or crimson, because the discovery and earliest use of this colour was ascribed to the Phoenicians, Hom.
as adj., ὁ, (also φοίνισσα as fem. in Pind.), red, dark red, of a bay horse, Il.; of red cattle, Pind.; of fire, id. Pind., Eur.:— φοῖνιξ and its derivs. included all dark reds, from crimson to purple, while the brighter shades were denoted by πορφύρεος, ἁλουργής, κόκκινος.
the date-palm, palm, Od., Eur., etc.
the fabulous bird phoenix, which came from Arabia to Egypt every 500 years, Hdt.:—proverb., φοίνικος ἔτη βιοῦν Luc.
Noun-APM — Noun · accusative · plural · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
N-APM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 21 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τεύξῃ δὲ τῶν ἄθλων, ἐὰν γυνή σου γένηται ἡ τοῦ Ἰούδα νύμφη Θάμαρ, ἥτις ἑρμηνεύεται φοῖνιξ, σύμβολον νίκης·
καὶ γὰρ οἱ φοίνικες ὄντες οὐ πλείους ἑβδομήκοντα δυσαυξεῖς τε ἦσαν καὶ χαμαίζηλοι διʼ ὕδατος ἀπορίαν ψαφαροῦ τοῦ παντὸς ὄντος χωρίου·
ὄρνεον γάρ ἐστιν, ὃ προσονομάζεται φοῖνιξ: τοῦτο μονογενὲς ὑπάρχον ζῇ ἔτη πεντακόσια, γενόμενόν τε ἤδη πρὸς ἀπόλυσιν τοῦ ἀποθανεῖν αὐτό, σηκὸν ἑαυτῷ ποιεῖ ἐκ λιβάνου καὶ σμύρνης καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ἀρωμάτων, εἰς ὃν πληρωθέντος τοῦ χρόνου εἰσέρχεται καὶ…
τε ὑπαρχούσας μοι περὶ Φιλαδέλφειαν … ἀρούρας δύο ἢ ὅσαι ἐὰν ὦσι, ἐν αἷς φοίνικες … καὶ τὸ ὑπάρχον μοι ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ κώμῃ πατρικὸν ἥμισυ μέρος κοινὸν καὶ
παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν τῷ Φρόντωνι περὶ Φιλαδέλφειαν γῆς ἄρουραν μίαν ἥμισυ ἐν ᾗ φοίνικες σποράδεις οὖσαν κοινὴν καὶ ἀδιαίρετον ἀπὸ ἀρουρῶν τριῶν εἰς ἔτη τέσσαρα , καρποὺς τέσσαρας
τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Φιλαδελφίας ἐρημοφυλακίας Διωγένης ἐξάγων φοινίκων χλωρῶν ὄνον ἕνα καὶ πυροῦ ὄνον ἕνα . ἔτους ἑνδεκάτου Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου
The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.
ἐν,
prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).
Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…
Read the full entry →ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…
Read the full entry →ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…
Read the full entry →ἐν (en) — in/on/among.
ἐν,
poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]
__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.
__A WITH DAT.
__A.I OF PLACE,
__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…
ἐν
en
a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or
state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or
constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519
and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +
almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+
all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,
-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,
one, X quickly,
X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),
through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,
with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same
import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate
direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)
preposition.
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1537
ἐν
Prep.
in, on, among
ἐν en 2x
followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of,
ἐν
e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.
Lat. in.
PREP. WITH DAT.:
OF PLACE
in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.
in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.
in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.
in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.
in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…
2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DPF — Article · dative · plural · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
T-DPF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
χείρ (cheir) is a feminine noun meaning 'hand,' used in various contexts both literally and figuratively, such as power or agency. It appears frequently in the New Testament, notably in verses like Matthew 3:12 and Acts 11:21. The word is built from a root suggesting the idea of grasping, and it encompasses a range of uses, including physical actions and metaphorical expressions of authority.
χείρ, gen., χειρος (acc., χεῖραν, I Pe 5:6 T), ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly for יָד ;]
the hand: Mt 3:12, Mk 3:1, Lk 6:6, al. mult.; ἡ χ., acting subject, Lk 22:21; pl., Ac 17:25 20:34, I Jo 1:1; τ. ἔργα τῶν χ., Ac 7:41, Re 9:20; ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τ. ἐμῇ χ., I Co 16:21, Col 4:18, II Th 3:17…
Read the full entry →χείρ, gen. χειρός, acc. χεῖραν (1 Pet. v.6 Tdf.; see ἄρσην, fin.), 7, [fr. τ. meaning ‘to lay hold of’; ef. Lat. heres, οἴου; Curtius § 189; Vanicek p. 249 sq.], fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 1, the hand: Mt. iii. 12; Mk. iii. 1; Lk. vi. 6; 1 Tim. ii. 8; Heb. xii. 12, and often; the gen. with the verbs ἅπτομαι. ἐπιλαμβάνομαι, κρατέω, πιάζω, etc., which see in their places; the dat. with ἐργάζομαι, ἐσθίω, ete. ; 6 ἀσπασμὸς TH ἐμῇ χειρί, 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col.iv.18; 2 Th. iii. 17; the acc. with the verbs αἴρω, δέω. ἐκπετάννυμι, ἐκτείνω, ἐμβάπτω. ἐπιτίθημι, καθαρίζω, κατασείω. vinta, ete. ἡ ἐπίθεσις τῶν χειρῶν [see ἐπίθεσις and reff.], 1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim. i.6; Heb.vi.2; ἐν χειρί τινος, in imitation of the Hebr. “3. 1a [ef. Β. 8188, 20 cf. 319 sq. (274) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 19], by the help or agency, of any one, by means of any one, Acts vii. 35 Rec.; Gal. iii. 19; σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου, with the…
Read the full entry →χείρ χείρ, “ἐᾷ hand.”” The grammatical forms of this common noun are fully illustrated by Mayser Gr. p. 282f. For its varied uses we may cite—P Par 637° (B.c. 164) (=P Petr III. p- 36) φροντίζεσθ᾽ ὅπως μηθεὶς ἐπ[ι]βάλληι τὰ[ς] χεῖρας τοῖς τοιούτοις κατὰ μηδεμίαν π[αρ]εύρεϊσιν, ‘take care that no one lay violent hands on such persons on any pretext whatever ’’ (Mahaffy): Perxg 268 C™ (B.c. 98) τὸν παρακα]λέσοντα δοῦναι τ[ὰ]ς χεῖρας ἡμῖν εἰ[ς σύλλυσιν, ‘to give the hands towards an agreement to be brought about by us,”’ a usage for which Deissmann (8S p. 251) can find no other ex., but compares Gal 2° δεξιὰς ἔδωκαν... κοινωνίας, and similar phrases in 1 and 2 Macc. : P Tebt II. 39178 (a.D. go) ἡ χὶρ ἥδη κυρία ἔστω ws ἐν δημοσίωι κατακεχωρισμένη, “this bond shall be valid, as if it had been publicly registered” (Edd.), similarly 76. 37918 (A.D. 128): BGU II. 42316 (ii/A.D.) (= Selections…
Read the full entry →χείρ (cheir) — hand.
χείρ, ἡ, χειρός, χειρί, χεῖρα,
dual χεῖρε, χεροῖν, plural χεῖρες, χερῶν, χεῖρας, penultimate being regularly short, when the ultima is long; dative plural regularly χερσί (χειρσί occurs in codex Vat. of [LXX], and late Inscrr. as [Refs 8th c.BC+], and once in trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χέρεσσι (ν) [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—Doric dialect nominative χέρς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χήρ [Refs 5th c.BC+] (also, ={δίψακος}, Ps.-[Refs 7th c.BC+]:— the hand, whether closed, παχεῖα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; or open, flat, χερσὶ καταπρηνέσσι, χειρὶ καταπρηνεῖ,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently in plural where a single hand is meant, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, singular where more than one hand is spoken of, e.g. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dual joined with plural, ἄμφω χεῖρας [Refs 8th…
Read the full entry →χείρ
cheir
perhaps from the base of 5494 in the sense of its congener the base of
5490 (through the idea of hollowness for grasping); the hand
(literally or figuratively (power); especially (by Hebraism) a means
or instrument):--hand.
see GREEK for 5494
see GREEK for 5490
χείρ, χειρός, ἡ
n.f.
a hand
χείρ cheir 177x
a hand, Mt. 3:12; 4:6; 8:15 freq.; from the Hebrew, χεὶρ Κυρίου, a special operation of God, Acts 11:21; 13:3; ἐν χειρί, by agency, Acts 7:35; Gal. 3:19
χείρ the penult. is regularly short, when the ult. is long: e.g. χειρός, χερών, but Poets used the penult. long or short, as the verse required. the hand, Hom., etc.: also the hand and arm, the arm, χεῖρα μέσην ἀγκῶνος ἔνερθεν Il.; χεῖρες ἀπ᾽ ὤμων ἀΐσσοντο Hes.; so, ἐν χερσὶ πεσεῖν into the arms, Il., etc.; ἄκρη χείρ, to denote the hand as distinct from the arm, id. Il.
Special usages:
to denote position, ἐπ᾽ ἀριστερὰ χειρός Od.; ἐπὶ δεξιὰ χειρός Pind.; λαιᾶς χειρός on the left hand, Aesch.; ποτέρας τῆς χειρός; on which hand? Eur.
the dat. is common with Verbs which imply the use of hands, χειρὶ λαβεῖν, χερσὶν ἑλέσθαι, etc., Hom., etc.
Noun-DPF — Noun · dative · plural · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
N-DPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
180 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 176 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 860 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
κεφαλή, στέρνα, γαστήρ, διτταὶ χεῖρες, διτταὶ βάσεις·
Ἐξῆρέ τε αὐτοὺς πρός τε ὕβριν τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ καταφρόνησιν Ναβρώδης, ὃς υἱωνὸς μὲν ἦν Χάμου τοῦ Νώχου, τολμηρὸς δὲ καὶ κατὰ χεῖρα γενναῖος·
πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;
ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμοῦ … ἵνα μὴ διασπάσηται κροκοδίλος … α, παραλαβών με Ψοσναῦς τὰς χεῖρας με προσήνεκεν καὶ τὴν γυναῖκά μου ἐπαροίνησεν ἐναντίον μαρτύρων Πετεμοῦνις καὶ Θοτεὺς τῶν παρὰ
λε Τῦβι δ. προσάγγελμα Ζήνωνι. νυκτὸς ἐκ τοῦ σιτοβολῶνος ἀπόλωλεν σήσαμον καὶ λελέανται τῆι χειρί. διὸ οὐ δυνάμεθά πως ἐπιμετρήσαντες ἰδεῖν τὸ ἀπολωλὸς ἕως ἂν ὑμεῖς ἴδητε καὶ ἐναντίον
εἰς τὸ κατάλυμα … οἱ ὑοφορβοὶ προσπηδήσαντός με τῆι ιθ ὀψὲ τῆς ὥρας τὰς χεῖρας με προσήνεγκαν … … … … … … ἐπὶ τοὺς φυλακίτας … … υρον
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-GPM — Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
P-GPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος